diff --git a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.activities.html b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.activities.html
index 77614aa..ffb4b01 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.activities.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/admin_reports_v1.activities.html
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@
       token - The Token application&#x27;s activity reports return account information about different types of Token activity events.
       user_accounts - The User Accounts application&#x27;s activity reports return account information about different types of User Accounts activity events.
       context_aware_access - The Context-aware access activity reports return information about users&#x27; access denied events due to Context-aware access rules.
-      chrome - The Chrome activity reports return information about unsafe events reported in the context of the WebProtect features of BeyondCorp.
+      chrome - The Chrome activity reports return information about Chrome browser and Chrome OS events.
       data_studio - The Data Studio activity reports return information about various types of Data Studio activity events.
       keep - The Keep application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Google Keep activity events. The Keep activity report is only available for Google Workspace Business and Enterprise customers.
   actorIpAddress: string, The Internet Protocol (IP) Address of host where the event was performed. This is an additional way to filter a report&#x27;s summary using the IP address of the user whose activity is being reported. This IP address may or may not reflect the user&#x27;s physical location. For example, the IP address can be the user&#x27;s proxy server&#x27;s address or a virtual private network (VPN) address. This parameter supports both IPv4 and IPv6 address versions.
@@ -266,7 +266,7 @@
       token - The Token application&#x27;s activity reports return account information about different types of Token activity events.
       user_accounts - The User Accounts application&#x27;s activity reports return account information about different types of User Accounts activity events.
       context_aware_access - The Context-aware access activity reports return information about users&#x27; access denied events due to Context-aware access rules.
-      chrome - The Chrome activity reports return information about unsafe events reported in the context of the WebProtect features of BeyondCorp.
+      chrome - The Chrome activity reports return information about Chrome browser and Chrome OS events.
       data_studio - The Data Studio activity reports return information about various types of Data Studio activity events.
       keep - The Keep application&#x27;s activity reports return information about various Google Keep activity events. The Keep activity report is only available for Google Workspace Business and Enterprise customers.
   body: object, The request body.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.html b/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.html
index b7bafa5..2fb1efd 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/androidmanagement_v1.enterprises.html
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@
 
 { # The configuration applied to an enterprise.
   &quot;appAutoApprovalEnabled&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated and unused.
-  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for LaForge enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
+  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for managed Google Play enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
     &quot;contactEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Email address for a point of contact, which will be used to send important announcements related to managed Google Play.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email of the data protection officer. The email is validated but not verified.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the data protection officer.
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@
 
     { # The configuration applied to an enterprise.
   &quot;appAutoApprovalEnabled&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated and unused.
-  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for LaForge enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
+  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for managed Google Play enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
     &quot;contactEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Email address for a point of contact, which will be used to send important announcements related to managed Google Play.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email of the data protection officer. The email is validated but not verified.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the data protection officer.
@@ -282,7 +282,7 @@
 
     { # The configuration applied to an enterprise.
   &quot;appAutoApprovalEnabled&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated and unused.
-  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for LaForge enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
+  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for managed Google Play enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
     &quot;contactEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Email address for a point of contact, which will be used to send important announcements related to managed Google Play.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email of the data protection officer. The email is validated but not verified.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the data protection officer.
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@
   &quot;enterprises&quot;: [ # The list of enterprises.
     { # The configuration applied to an enterprise.
       &quot;appAutoApprovalEnabled&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated and unused.
-      &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for LaForge enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
+      &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for managed Google Play enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
         &quot;contactEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Email address for a point of contact, which will be used to send important announcements related to managed Google Play.
         &quot;dataProtectionOfficerEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email of the data protection officer. The email is validated but not verified.
         &quot;dataProtectionOfficerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the data protection officer.
@@ -428,7 +428,7 @@
 
 { # The configuration applied to an enterprise.
   &quot;appAutoApprovalEnabled&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated and unused.
-  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for LaForge enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
+  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for managed Google Play enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
     &quot;contactEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Email address for a point of contact, which will be used to send important announcements related to managed Google Play.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email of the data protection officer. The email is validated but not verified.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the data protection officer.
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@
 
     { # The configuration applied to an enterprise.
   &quot;appAutoApprovalEnabled&quot;: True or False, # Deprecated and unused.
-  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for LaForge enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
+  &quot;contactInfo&quot;: { # Contact details for managed Google Play enterprises. # The enterprise contact info of an EMM-managed enterprise.
     &quot;contactEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Email address for a point of contact, which will be used to send important announcements related to managed Google Play.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerEmail&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The email of the data protection officer. The email is validated but not verified.
     &quot;dataProtectionOfficerName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the data protection officer.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.environments.html b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.environments.html
index d24f552..de972b9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.environments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.environments.html
@@ -483,6 +483,7 @@
   &quot;sequenceNumber&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # DEPRECATED: Use revision_id.
   &quot;targets&quot;: [ # List of target servers in the environment. Disabled target servers are not displayed.
     {
+      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the target server is enabled. An empty/omitted value for this field should be interpreted as true.
       &quot;host&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Host name of the target server.
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Target server revision name in the following format: `organizations/{org}/environments/{env}/targetservers/{targetserver}/revisions/{rev}`
       &quot;port&quot;: 42, # Port number for the target server.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.instances.html b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.instances.html
index a423ce2..6bbf098 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/apigee_v1.organizations.instances.html
@@ -139,6 +139,7 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Resource ID of the instance. Values must match the regular expression `^a-z{0,30}[a-z\d]$`.
   &quot;peeringCidrRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Size of the CIDR block range that will be reserved by the instance. PAID organizations support `SLASH_16` to `SLASH_20` and defaults to `SLASH_16`. Evaluation organizations support only `SLASH_23`.
   &quot;port&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Port number of the exposed Apigee endpoint.
+  &quot;runtimeVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Version of the runtime system running in the instance. The runtime system is the set of components that serve the API Proxy traffic in your Environments.
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the instance. Values other than `ACTIVE` means the resource is not ready to use.
 }
 
@@ -231,6 +232,7 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Resource ID of the instance. Values must match the regular expression `^a-z{0,30}[a-z\d]$`.
   &quot;peeringCidrRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Size of the CIDR block range that will be reserved by the instance. PAID organizations support `SLASH_16` to `SLASH_20` and defaults to `SLASH_16`. Evaluation organizations support only `SLASH_23`.
   &quot;port&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Port number of the exposed Apigee endpoint.
+  &quot;runtimeVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Version of the runtime system running in the instance. The runtime system is the set of components that serve the API Proxy traffic in your Environments.
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the instance. Values other than `ACTIVE` means the resource is not ready to use.
 }</pre>
 </div>
@@ -264,6 +266,7 @@
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Resource ID of the instance. Values must match the regular expression `^a-z{0,30}[a-z\d]$`.
       &quot;peeringCidrRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Size of the CIDR block range that will be reserved by the instance. PAID organizations support `SLASH_16` to `SLASH_20` and defaults to `SLASH_16`. Evaluation organizations support only `SLASH_23`.
       &quot;port&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Port number of the exposed Apigee endpoint.
+      &quot;runtimeVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Version of the runtime system running in the instance. The runtime system is the set of components that serve the API Proxy traffic in your Environments.
       &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the instance. Values other than `ACTIVE` means the resource is not ready to use.
     },
   ],
@@ -305,6 +308,7 @@
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Resource ID of the instance. Values must match the regular expression `^a-z{0,30}[a-z\d]$`.
   &quot;peeringCidrRange&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Size of the CIDR block range that will be reserved by the instance. PAID organizations support `SLASH_16` to `SLASH_20` and defaults to `SLASH_16`. Evaluation organizations support only `SLASH_23`.
   &quot;port&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Port number of the exposed Apigee endpoint.
+  &quot;runtimeVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Version of the runtime system running in the instance. The runtime system is the set of components that serve the API Proxy traffic in your Environments.
   &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. State of the instance. Values other than `ACTIVE` means the resource is not ready to use.
 }
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.jobs.html b/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.jobs.html
index f032ba7..3eb73e5 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.jobs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.jobs.html
@@ -347,6 +347,9 @@
         &quot;tableDefinitions&quot;: { # [Optional] If querying an external data source outside of BigQuery, describes the data format, location and other properties of the data source. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: {
             &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+            &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+              &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+            },
             &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
               &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
                 {
@@ -975,6 +978,9 @@
       &quot;tableDefinitions&quot;: { # [Optional] If querying an external data source outside of BigQuery, describes the data format, location and other properties of the data source. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: {
           &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+          &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+            &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+          },
           &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
             &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
               {
@@ -1673,6 +1679,9 @@
       &quot;tableDefinitions&quot;: { # [Optional] If querying an external data source outside of BigQuery, describes the data format, location and other properties of the data source. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: {
           &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+          &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+            &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+          },
           &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
             &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
               {
@@ -2276,6 +2285,9 @@
       &quot;tableDefinitions&quot;: { # [Optional] If querying an external data source outside of BigQuery, describes the data format, location and other properties of the data source. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: {
           &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+          &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+            &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+          },
           &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
             &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
               {
@@ -2902,6 +2914,9 @@
           &quot;tableDefinitions&quot;: { # [Optional] If querying an external data source outside of BigQuery, describes the data format, location and other properties of the data source. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: {
               &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+              &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+                &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+              },
               &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
                 &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
                   {
diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.routines.html b/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.routines.html
index 781a05e..15b4f5b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.routines.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.routines.html
@@ -183,6 +183,7 @@
     &quot;routineId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Required] The ID of the routine. The ID must contain only letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), or underscores (_). The maximum length is 256 characters.
   },
   &quot;routineType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The type of routine.
+  &quot;strictMode&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Can be set for procedures only. If true (default), the definition body will be validated in the creation and the updates of the procedure. For procedures with an argument of ANY TYPE, the definition body validtion is not supported at creation/update time, and thus this field must be set to false explicitly.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -254,6 +255,7 @@
     &quot;routineId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Required] The ID of the routine. The ID must contain only letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), or underscores (_). The maximum length is 256 characters.
   },
   &quot;routineType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The type of routine.
+  &quot;strictMode&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Can be set for procedures only. If true (default), the definition body will be validated in the creation and the updates of the procedure. For procedures with an argument of ANY TYPE, the definition body validtion is not supported at creation/update time, and thus this field must be set to false explicitly.
 }
 
 
@@ -318,6 +320,7 @@
     &quot;routineId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Required] The ID of the routine. The ID must contain only letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), or underscores (_). The maximum length is 256 characters.
   },
   &quot;routineType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The type of routine.
+  &quot;strictMode&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Can be set for procedures only. If true (default), the definition body will be validated in the creation and the updates of the procedure. For procedures with an argument of ANY TYPE, the definition body validtion is not supported at creation/update time, and thus this field must be set to false explicitly.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -397,6 +400,7 @@
         &quot;routineId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Required] The ID of the routine. The ID must contain only letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), or underscores (_). The maximum length is 256 characters.
       },
       &quot;routineType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The type of routine.
+      &quot;strictMode&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Can be set for procedures only. If true (default), the definition body will be validated in the creation and the updates of the procedure. For procedures with an argument of ANY TYPE, the definition body validtion is not supported at creation/update time, and thus this field must be set to false explicitly.
     },
   ],
 }</pre>
@@ -485,6 +489,7 @@
     &quot;routineId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Required] The ID of the routine. The ID must contain only letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), or underscores (_). The maximum length is 256 characters.
   },
   &quot;routineType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The type of routine.
+  &quot;strictMode&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Can be set for procedures only. If true (default), the definition body will be validated in the creation and the updates of the procedure. For procedures with an argument of ANY TYPE, the definition body validtion is not supported at creation/update time, and thus this field must be set to false explicitly.
 }
 
 
@@ -549,6 +554,7 @@
     &quot;routineId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Required] The ID of the routine. The ID must contain only letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), or underscores (_). The maximum length is 256 characters.
   },
   &quot;routineType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The type of routine.
+  &quot;strictMode&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Can be set for procedures only. If true (default), the definition body will be validated in the creation and the updates of the procedure. For procedures with an argument of ANY TYPE, the definition body validtion is not supported at creation/update time, and thus this field must be set to false explicitly.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.tables.html b/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.tables.html
index 084dedb..5737253 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.tables.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/bigquery_v2.tables.html
@@ -152,6 +152,9 @@
   &quot;expirationTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Optional] The time when this table expires, in milliseconds since the epoch. If not present, the table will persist indefinitely. Expired tables will be deleted and their storage reclaimed. The defaultTableExpirationMs property of the encapsulating dataset can be used to set a default expirationTime on newly created tables.
   &quot;externalDataConfiguration&quot;: { # [Optional] Describes the data format, location, and other properties of a table stored outside of BigQuery. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
     &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+    &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+      &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+    },
     &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
       &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
         {
@@ -441,6 +444,9 @@
   &quot;expirationTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Optional] The time when this table expires, in milliseconds since the epoch. If not present, the table will persist indefinitely. Expired tables will be deleted and their storage reclaimed. The defaultTableExpirationMs property of the encapsulating dataset can be used to set a default expirationTime on newly created tables.
   &quot;externalDataConfiguration&quot;: { # [Optional] Describes the data format, location, and other properties of a table stored outside of BigQuery. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
     &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+    &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+      &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+    },
     &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
       &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
         {
@@ -671,6 +677,9 @@
   &quot;expirationTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Optional] The time when this table expires, in milliseconds since the epoch. If not present, the table will persist indefinitely. Expired tables will be deleted and their storage reclaimed. The defaultTableExpirationMs property of the encapsulating dataset can be used to set a default expirationTime on newly created tables.
   &quot;externalDataConfiguration&quot;: { # [Optional] Describes the data format, location, and other properties of a table stored outside of BigQuery. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
     &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+    &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+      &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+    },
     &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
       &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
         {
@@ -984,6 +993,9 @@
   &quot;expirationTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Optional] The time when this table expires, in milliseconds since the epoch. If not present, the table will persist indefinitely. Expired tables will be deleted and their storage reclaimed. The defaultTableExpirationMs property of the encapsulating dataset can be used to set a default expirationTime on newly created tables.
   &quot;externalDataConfiguration&quot;: { # [Optional] Describes the data format, location, and other properties of a table stored outside of BigQuery. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
     &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+    &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+      &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+    },
     &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
       &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
         {
@@ -1214,6 +1226,9 @@
   &quot;expirationTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Optional] The time when this table expires, in milliseconds since the epoch. If not present, the table will persist indefinitely. Expired tables will be deleted and their storage reclaimed. The defaultTableExpirationMs property of the encapsulating dataset can be used to set a default expirationTime on newly created tables.
   &quot;externalDataConfiguration&quot;: { # [Optional] Describes the data format, location, and other properties of a table stored outside of BigQuery. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
     &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+    &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+      &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+    },
     &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
       &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
         {
@@ -1559,6 +1574,9 @@
   &quot;expirationTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Optional] The time when this table expires, in milliseconds since the epoch. If not present, the table will persist indefinitely. Expired tables will be deleted and their storage reclaimed. The defaultTableExpirationMs property of the encapsulating dataset can be used to set a default expirationTime on newly created tables.
   &quot;externalDataConfiguration&quot;: { # [Optional] Describes the data format, location, and other properties of a table stored outside of BigQuery. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
     &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+    &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+      &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+    },
     &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
       &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
         {
@@ -1789,6 +1807,9 @@
   &quot;expirationTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Optional] The time when this table expires, in milliseconds since the epoch. If not present, the table will persist indefinitely. Expired tables will be deleted and their storage reclaimed. The defaultTableExpirationMs property of the encapsulating dataset can be used to set a default expirationTime on newly created tables.
   &quot;externalDataConfiguration&quot;: { # [Optional] Describes the data format, location, and other properties of a table stored outside of BigQuery. By defining these properties, the data source can then be queried as if it were a standard BigQuery table.
     &quot;autodetect&quot;: True or False, # Try to detect schema and format options automatically. Any option specified explicitly will be honored.
+    &quot;avroOptions&quot;: { # Additional properties to set if sourceFormat is set to Avro.
+      &quot;useAvroLogicalTypes&quot;: True or False, # [Optional] If set to true will enable interpreting logical types into their corresponding types (ie. TIMESTAMP), instead of only using their raw types (ie. INTEGER).
+    },
     &quot;bigtableOptions&quot;: { # [Optional] Additional options if sourceFormat is set to BIGTABLE.
       &quot;columnFamilies&quot;: [ # [Optional] List of column families to expose in the table schema along with their types. This list restricts the column families that can be referenced in queries and specifies their value types. You can use this list to do type conversions - see the &#x27;type&#x27; field for more details. If you leave this list empty, all column families are present in the table schema and their values are read as BYTES. During a query only the column families referenced in that query are read from Bigtable.
         {
diff --git a/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.teachers.html b/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.teachers.html
index edeed98..635f73b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.teachers.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/classroom_v1.courses.teachers.html
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Creates a teacher of a course. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to create teachers in this course or for access errors. * `NOT_FOUND` if the requested course ID does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested user's account is disabled, for the following request errors: * CourseMemberLimitReached * CourseNotModifiable * CourseTeacherLimitReached * UserGroupsMembershipLimitReached * `ALREADY_EXISTS` if the user is already a teacher or student in the course.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(courseId, userId, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Deletes a teacher of a course. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to delete teachers of this course or for access errors. * `NOT_FOUND` if no teacher of this course has the requested ID or if the course does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested ID belongs to the primary teacher of this course.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes a teacher of a course. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to delete teachers of this course or for access errors. * `NOT_FOUND` if no teacher of this course has the requested ID or if the course does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested ID belongs to the primary teacher of this course. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested ID belongs to the owner of the course Drive folder. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the course no longer has an active owner.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(courseId, userId, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Returns a teacher of a course. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to view teachers of this course or for access errors. * `NOT_FOUND` if no teacher of this course has the requested ID or if the course does not exist.</p>
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="delete">delete(courseId, userId, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Deletes a teacher of a course. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to delete teachers of this course or for access errors. * `NOT_FOUND` if no teacher of this course has the requested ID or if the course does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested ID belongs to the primary teacher of this course.
+  <pre>Deletes a teacher of a course. This method returns the following error codes: * `PERMISSION_DENIED` if the requesting user is not permitted to delete teachers of this course or for access errors. * `NOT_FOUND` if no teacher of this course has the requested ID or if the course does not exist. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested ID belongs to the primary teacher of this course. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the requested ID belongs to the owner of the course Drive folder. * `FAILED_PRECONDITION` if the course no longer has an active owner.
 
 Args:
   courseId: string, Identifier of the course. This identifier can be either the Classroom-assigned identifier or an alias. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.assets.html b/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.assets.html
index cf0477c..f90a125 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.assets.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.assets.html
@@ -262,6 +262,17 @@
                 &quot;hotFixId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier associated with a particular QFE update.
                 &quot;installTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Date that the QFE update was installed. Mapped from installed_on field.
               },
+              &quot;windowsApplication&quot;: { # Contains information about a Windows application as retrieved from the Windows Registry. For more information about these fields, see [Windows Installer Properties for the Uninstall Registry](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/msi/uninstall-registry-key){: class=&quot;external&quot; } # Details of Windows Application.
+                &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the application or product.
+                &quot;displayVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the product or application in string format.
+                &quot;helpLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The internet address for technical support.
+                &quot;installDate&quot;: { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values * A month and day value, with a zero year, such as an anniversary * A year on its own, with zero month and day values * A year and month value, with a zero day, such as a credit card expiration date Related types are google.type.TimeOfDay and `google.protobuf.Timestamp`. # The last time this product received service. The value of this property is replaced each time a patch is applied or removed from the product or the command-line option is used to repair the product.
+                  &quot;day&quot;: 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn&#x27;t significant.
+                  &quot;month&quot;: 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+                  &quot;year&quot;: 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+                },
+                &quot;publisher&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the manufacturer for the product or application.
+              },
               &quot;wuaPackage&quot;: { # Details related to a Windows Update package. Field data and names are taken from Windows Update API IUpdate Interface: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ Descriptive fields like title, and description are localized based on the locale of the VM being updated. # Details of a Windows Update package. See https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ for information about Windows Update.
                 &quot;categories&quot;: [ # The categories that are associated with this update package.
                   { # Categories specified by the Windows Update.
@@ -323,6 +334,17 @@
                 &quot;hotFixId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier associated with a particular QFE update.
                 &quot;installTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Date that the QFE update was installed. Mapped from installed_on field.
               },
+              &quot;windowsApplication&quot;: { # Contains information about a Windows application as retrieved from the Windows Registry. For more information about these fields, see [Windows Installer Properties for the Uninstall Registry](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/msi/uninstall-registry-key){: class=&quot;external&quot; } # Details of Windows Application.
+                &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the application or product.
+                &quot;displayVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the product or application in string format.
+                &quot;helpLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The internet address for technical support.
+                &quot;installDate&quot;: { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values * A month and day value, with a zero year, such as an anniversary * A year on its own, with zero month and day values * A year and month value, with a zero day, such as a credit card expiration date Related types are google.type.TimeOfDay and `google.protobuf.Timestamp`. # The last time this product received service. The value of this property is replaced each time a patch is applied or removed from the product or the command-line option is used to repair the product.
+                  &quot;day&quot;: 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn&#x27;t significant.
+                  &quot;month&quot;: 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+                  &quot;year&quot;: 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+                },
+                &quot;publisher&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the manufacturer for the product or application.
+              },
               &quot;wuaPackage&quot;: { # Details related to a Windows Update package. Field data and names are taken from Windows Update API IUpdate Interface: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ Descriptive fields like title, and description are localized based on the locale of the VM being updated. # Details of a Windows Update package. See https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ for information about Windows Update.
                 &quot;categories&quot;: [ # The categories that are associated with this update package.
                   { # Categories specified by the Windows Update.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.v1.html b/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.v1.html
index afe541d..eb0046b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.v1.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/cloudasset_v1.v1.html
@@ -649,6 +649,17 @@
                   &quot;hotFixId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier associated with a particular QFE update.
                   &quot;installTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Date that the QFE update was installed. Mapped from installed_on field.
                 },
+                &quot;windowsApplication&quot;: { # Contains information about a Windows application as retrieved from the Windows Registry. For more information about these fields, see [Windows Installer Properties for the Uninstall Registry](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/msi/uninstall-registry-key){: class=&quot;external&quot; } # Details of Windows Application.
+                  &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the application or product.
+                  &quot;displayVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the product or application in string format.
+                  &quot;helpLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The internet address for technical support.
+                  &quot;installDate&quot;: { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values * A month and day value, with a zero year, such as an anniversary * A year on its own, with zero month and day values * A year and month value, with a zero day, such as a credit card expiration date Related types are google.type.TimeOfDay and `google.protobuf.Timestamp`. # The last time this product received service. The value of this property is replaced each time a patch is applied or removed from the product or the command-line option is used to repair the product.
+                    &quot;day&quot;: 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn&#x27;t significant.
+                    &quot;month&quot;: 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+                    &quot;year&quot;: 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+                  },
+                  &quot;publisher&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the manufacturer for the product or application.
+                },
                 &quot;wuaPackage&quot;: { # Details related to a Windows Update package. Field data and names are taken from Windows Update API IUpdate Interface: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ Descriptive fields like title, and description are localized based on the locale of the VM being updated. # Details of a Windows Update package. See https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ for information about Windows Update.
                   &quot;categories&quot;: [ # The categories that are associated with this update package.
                     { # Categories specified by the Windows Update.
@@ -710,6 +721,17 @@
                   &quot;hotFixId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier associated with a particular QFE update.
                   &quot;installTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Date that the QFE update was installed. Mapped from installed_on field.
                 },
+                &quot;windowsApplication&quot;: { # Contains information about a Windows application as retrieved from the Windows Registry. For more information about these fields, see [Windows Installer Properties for the Uninstall Registry](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/msi/uninstall-registry-key){: class=&quot;external&quot; } # Details of Windows Application.
+                  &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the application or product.
+                  &quot;displayVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the product or application in string format.
+                  &quot;helpLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The internet address for technical support.
+                  &quot;installDate&quot;: { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values * A month and day value, with a zero year, such as an anniversary * A year on its own, with zero month and day values * A year and month value, with a zero day, such as a credit card expiration date Related types are google.type.TimeOfDay and `google.protobuf.Timestamp`. # The last time this product received service. The value of this property is replaced each time a patch is applied or removed from the product or the command-line option is used to repair the product.
+                    &quot;day&quot;: 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn&#x27;t significant.
+                    &quot;month&quot;: 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+                    &quot;year&quot;: 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+                  },
+                  &quot;publisher&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the manufacturer for the product or application.
+                },
                 &quot;wuaPackage&quot;: { # Details related to a Windows Update package. Field data and names are taken from Windows Update API IUpdate Interface: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ Descriptive fields like title, and description are localized based on the locale of the VM being updated. # Details of a Windows Update package. See https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ for information about Windows Update.
                   &quot;categories&quot;: [ # The categories that are associated with this update package.
                     { # Categories specified by the Windows Update.
@@ -1096,6 +1118,17 @@
                   &quot;hotFixId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier associated with a particular QFE update.
                   &quot;installTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Date that the QFE update was installed. Mapped from installed_on field.
                 },
+                &quot;windowsApplication&quot;: { # Contains information about a Windows application as retrieved from the Windows Registry. For more information about these fields, see [Windows Installer Properties for the Uninstall Registry](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/msi/uninstall-registry-key){: class=&quot;external&quot; } # Details of Windows Application.
+                  &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the application or product.
+                  &quot;displayVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the product or application in string format.
+                  &quot;helpLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The internet address for technical support.
+                  &quot;installDate&quot;: { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values * A month and day value, with a zero year, such as an anniversary * A year on its own, with zero month and day values * A year and month value, with a zero day, such as a credit card expiration date Related types are google.type.TimeOfDay and `google.protobuf.Timestamp`. # The last time this product received service. The value of this property is replaced each time a patch is applied or removed from the product or the command-line option is used to repair the product.
+                    &quot;day&quot;: 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn&#x27;t significant.
+                    &quot;month&quot;: 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+                    &quot;year&quot;: 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+                  },
+                  &quot;publisher&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the manufacturer for the product or application.
+                },
                 &quot;wuaPackage&quot;: { # Details related to a Windows Update package. Field data and names are taken from Windows Update API IUpdate Interface: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ Descriptive fields like title, and description are localized based on the locale of the VM being updated. # Details of a Windows Update package. See https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ for information about Windows Update.
                   &quot;categories&quot;: [ # The categories that are associated with this update package.
                     { # Categories specified by the Windows Update.
@@ -1157,6 +1190,17 @@
                   &quot;hotFixId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier associated with a particular QFE update.
                   &quot;installTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Date that the QFE update was installed. Mapped from installed_on field.
                 },
+                &quot;windowsApplication&quot;: { # Contains information about a Windows application as retrieved from the Windows Registry. For more information about these fields, see [Windows Installer Properties for the Uninstall Registry](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/msi/uninstall-registry-key){: class=&quot;external&quot; } # Details of Windows Application.
+                  &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the application or product.
+                  &quot;displayVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the product or application in string format.
+                  &quot;helpLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The internet address for technical support.
+                  &quot;installDate&quot;: { # Represents a whole or partial calendar date, such as a birthday. The time of day and time zone are either specified elsewhere or are insignificant. The date is relative to the Gregorian Calendar. This can represent one of the following: * A full date, with non-zero year, month, and day values * A month and day value, with a zero year, such as an anniversary * A year on its own, with zero month and day values * A year and month value, with a zero day, such as a credit card expiration date Related types are google.type.TimeOfDay and `google.protobuf.Timestamp`. # The last time this product received service. The value of this property is replaced each time a patch is applied or removed from the product or the command-line option is used to repair the product.
+                    &quot;day&quot;: 42, # Day of a month. Must be from 1 to 31 and valid for the year and month, or 0 to specify a year by itself or a year and month where the day isn&#x27;t significant.
+                    &quot;month&quot;: 42, # Month of a year. Must be from 1 to 12, or 0 to specify a year without a month and day.
+                    &quot;year&quot;: 42, # Year of the date. Must be from 1 to 9999, or 0 to specify a date without a year.
+                  },
+                  &quot;publisher&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the manufacturer for the product or application.
+                },
                 &quot;wuaPackage&quot;: { # Details related to a Windows Update package. Field data and names are taken from Windows Update API IUpdate Interface: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ Descriptive fields like title, and description are localized based on the locale of the VM being updated. # Details of a Windows Update package. See https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/api/_wua/ for information about Windows Update.
                   &quot;categories&quot;: [ # The categories that are associated with this update package.
                     { # Categories specified by the Windows Update.
@@ -1627,6 +1671,16 @@
       &quot;parentAssetType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of this resource&#x27;s immediate parent, if there is one. To search against the `parent_asset_type`: * use a field query. Example: `parentAssetType:&quot;cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com/Project&quot;` * use a free text query. Example: `cloudresourcemanager.googleapis.com/Project`
       &quot;parentFullResourceName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The full resource name of this resource&#x27;s parent, if it has one. To search against the `parent_full_resource_name`: * use a field query. Example: `parentFullResourceName:&quot;project-name&quot;` * use a free text query. Example: `project-name`
       &quot;project&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The project that this resource belongs to, in the form of projects/{PROJECT_NUMBER}. This field is available when the resource belongs to a project. To search against `project`: * use a field query. Example: `project:12345` * use a free text query. Example: `12345` * specify the `scope` field as this project in your search request.
+      &quot;relationships&quot;: { # A map of related resources of this resource, keyed by the relationship type. A relationship type is in the format of {SourceType}_{ACTION}_{DestType}. Example: `DISK_TO_INSTANCE`, `DISK_TO_NETWORK`, `INSTANCE_TO_INSTANCEGROUP`. See [supported relationship types](https://cloud.google.com/asset-inventory/docs/supported-asset-types#supported_relationship_types).
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: { # The related resources of the primary resource.
+          &quot;relatedResources&quot;: [ # The detailed related resources of the primary resource.
+            { # The detailed related resource.
+              &quot;assetType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the asset. Example: `compute.googleapis.com/Instance`
+              &quot;fullResourceName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The full resource name of the related resource. Example: `//compute.googleapis.com/projects/my_proj_123/zones/instance/instance123`
+            },
+          ],
+        },
+      },
       &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The state of this resource. Different resources types have different state definitions that are mapped from various fields of different resource types. This field is available only when the resource&#x27;s proto contains it. Example: If the resource is an instance provided by Compute Engine, its state will include PROVISIONING, STAGING, RUNNING, STOPPING, SUSPENDING, SUSPENDED, REPAIRING, and TERMINATED. See `status` definition in [API Reference](https://cloud.google.com/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/instances). If the resource is a project provided by Cloud Resource Manager, its state will include LIFECYCLE_STATE_UNSPECIFIED, ACTIVE, DELETE_REQUESTED and DELETE_IN_PROGRESS. See `lifecycleState` definition in [API Reference](https://cloud.google.com/resource-manager/reference/rest/v1/projects). To search against the `state`: * use a field query. Example: `state:RUNNING` * use a free text query. Example: `RUNNING`
       &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The last update timestamp of this resource, at which the resource was last modified or deleted. The granularity is in seconds. Timestamp.nanos will always be 0. This field is available only when the resource&#x27;s proto contains it. To search against `update_time`: * use a field query. - value in seconds since unix epoch. Example: `updateTime &lt; 1609459200` - value in date string. Example: `updateTime &lt; 2021-01-01` - value in date-time string (must be quoted). Example: `updateTime &lt; &quot;2021-01-01T00:00:00&quot;`
       &quot;versionedResources&quot;: [ # Versioned resource representations of this resource. This is repeated because there could be multiple versions of resource representations during version migration. This `versioned_resources` field is not searchable. Some attributes of the resource representations are exposed in `additional_attributes` field, so as to allow users to search on them.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html
index 9fbe106..044d190 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.disks.html
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@
         { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
           &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
           &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-          &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+          &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
             &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
             &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
             &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -573,7 +573,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -775,7 +775,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -942,7 +942,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
       &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
         &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
         &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
         &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html
index e396f36..e99fd0c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.html
@@ -210,6 +210,11 @@
 <p class="firstline">Returns the instances Resource.</p>
 
 <p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="compute_alpha.instantSnapshots.html">instantSnapshots()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the instantSnapshots Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="compute_alpha.interconnectAttachments.html">interconnectAttachments()</a></code>
 </p>
 <p class="firstline">Returns the interconnectAttachments Resource.</p>
@@ -525,11 +530,6 @@
 <p class="firstline">Returns the zoneInPlaceSnapshots Resource.</p>
 
 <p class="toc_element">
-  <code><a href="compute_alpha.zoneInstantSnapshots.html">zoneInstantSnapshots()</a></code>
-</p>
-<p class="firstline">Returns the zoneInstantSnapshots Resource.</p>
-
-<p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="compute_alpha.zoneOperations.html">zoneOperations()</a></code>
 </p>
 <p class="firstline">Returns the zoneOperations Resource.</p>
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instantSnapshots.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instantSnapshots.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b2d35a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.instantSnapshots.html
@@ -0,0 +1,892 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="compute_alpha.html">Compute Engine API</a> . <a href="compute_alpha.instantSnapshots.html">instantSnapshots</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#delete">delete(project, zone, instantSnapshot, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes the specified InstantSnapshot resource. Keep in mind that deleting a single instantSnapshot might not necessarily delete all the data on that instantSnapshot. If any data on the instantSnapshot that is marked for deletion is needed for subsequent instantSnapshots, the data will be moved to the next corresponding instantSnapshot. For more information, see Deleting instantSnapshots.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#export">export(project, zone, instantSnapshot, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Export the changed blocks between two instant snapshots to a customer's bucket in the user specified format.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(project, zone, instantSnapshot, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the specified InstantSnapshot resource in the specified zone.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(project, zone, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#insert">insert(project, zone, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates an instant snapshot in the specified zone.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(project, zone, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the list of InstantSnapshot resources contained within the specified zone.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(project, zone, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#setLabels">setLabels(project, zone, resource, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Sets the labels on a instantSnapshot in the given zone. To learn more about labels, read the Labeling Resources documentation.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#testIamPermissions">testIamPermissions(project, zone, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(project, zone, instantSnapshot, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Deletes the specified InstantSnapshot resource. Keep in mind that deleting a single instantSnapshot might not necessarily delete all the data on that instantSnapshot. If any data on the instantSnapshot that is marked for deletion is needed for subsequent instantSnapshots, the data will be moved to the next corresponding instantSnapshot. For more information, see Deleting instantSnapshots.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  instantSnapshot: string, Name of the InstantSnapshot resource to delete. (required)
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
+        {
+          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="export">export(project, zone, instantSnapshot, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Export the changed blocks between two instant snapshots to a customer&#x27;s bucket in the user specified format.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  instantSnapshot: string, Name of the instant snapshot to export. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  &quot;exportParams&quot;: { # Parameters to export the changed blocks.
+    &quot;baseInstantSnapshot&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional base instant snapshot that this resource is compared against. If not specified, all blocks of this resource are exported. The base instant snapshot and this resource must be created from the same disk. The base instant snapshot must be created earlier in time than this resource.
+    &quot;bucketName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of an existing bucket in Cloud Storage where the changed blocks will be stored. The Google Service Account must have read and write access to this bucket. The bucket has to be in the same region as this resource.
+    &quot;encryptionKey&quot;: { # Encryption key used to encrypt the instant snapshot.
+      &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
+      &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
+      &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
+      &quot;rsaEncryptedKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies an RFC 4648 base64 encoded, RSA-wrapped 2048-bit customer-supplied encryption key to either encrypt or decrypt this resource. The key must meet the following requirements before you can provide it to Compute Engine: 1. The key is wrapped using a RSA public key certificate provided by Google. 2. After being wrapped, the key must be encoded in RFC 4648 base64 encoding. Gets the RSA public key certificate provided by Google at: https://cloud-certs.storage.googleapis.com/google-cloud-csek-ingress.pem
+      &quot;sha256&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output only] The RFC 4648 base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the customer-supplied encryption key that protects this resource.
+    },
+    &quot;objectName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the output Bigstore object storing the changed blocks. Object name must be less than 1024 bytes in length.
+    &quot;outputType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The format of the output file.
+  },
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
+        {
+          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(project, zone, instantSnapshot, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Returns the specified InstantSnapshot resource in the specified zone.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  instantSnapshot: string, Name of the InstantSnapshot resource to return. (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a InstantSnapshot resource. You can use instant snapshots to create disk rollback points quickly..
+  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  &quot;diskSizeGb&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Size of the source disk, specified in GB.
+  &quot;guestFlush&quot;: True or False, # Whether to attempt an application consistent instant snapshot by informing the OS to prepare for the snapshot process. Currently only supported on Windows instances using the Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS).
+  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#instantSnapshot&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#instantSnapshot for InstantSnapshot resources.
+  &quot;labelFingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fingerprint for the labels being applied to this InstantSnapshot, which is essentially a hash of the labels set used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a InstantSnapshot.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Labels to apply to this InstantSnapshot. These can be later modified by the setLabels method. Label values may be empty.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instant snapshot resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+  &quot;satisfiesPzs&quot;: True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource&#x27;s resource id.
+  &quot;sourceDisk&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL of the source disk used to create this instant snapshot. Note that the source disk must be in the same zone/region as the instant snapshot to be created. This can be a full or valid partial URL. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /disks/disk - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /disks/disk - projects/project/zones/zone/disks/disk - projects/project/regions/region/disks/disk - zones/zone/disks/disk - regions/region/disks/disk
+  &quot;sourceDiskId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The ID value of the disk used to create this InstantSnapshot. This value may be used to determine whether the InstantSnapshot was taken from the current or a previous instance of a given disk name.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the instantSnapshot. This can be CREATING, DELETING, FAILED, or READY.
+  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the zone where the instant snapshot resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(project, zone, resource, optionsRequestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets the access control policy for a resource. May be empty if no such policy or resource exists.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  optionsRequestedPolicyVersion: integer, Requested IAM Policy version.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
+  &quot;auditConfigs&quot;: [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
+    { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { &quot;audit_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;allServices&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;ADMIN_READ&quot; } ] }, { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;sampleservice.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:aliya@example.com&quot; ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging, and aliya@example.com from DATA_WRITE logging.
+      &quot;auditLogConfigs&quot;: [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
+        { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; } ] } This enables &#x27;DATA_READ&#x27; and &#x27;DATA_WRITE&#x27; logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
+          &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
+            &quot;A String&quot;,
+          ],
+          &quot;ignoreChildExemptions&quot;: True or False, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;logType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The log type that this config enables.
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;service&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+    { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+      &quot;bindingId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+  &quot;iamOwned&quot;: True or False, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+  &quot;rules&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+    { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;action&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;conditions&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;iam&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;svc&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;sys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;values&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;A String&quot;,
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;ins&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;logConfigs&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;cloudAudit&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;authorizationLoggingOptions&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              &quot;permissionType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            },
+            &quot;logName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          },
+          &quot;counter&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;customFields&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              },
+            ],
+            &quot;field&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;metric&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          },
+          &quot;dataAccess&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;logMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          },
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;notIns&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="insert">insert(project, zone, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Creates an instant snapshot in the specified zone.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, Name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a InstantSnapshot resource. You can use instant snapshots to create disk rollback points quickly..
+  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+  &quot;diskSizeGb&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Size of the source disk, specified in GB.
+  &quot;guestFlush&quot;: True or False, # Whether to attempt an application consistent instant snapshot by informing the OS to prepare for the snapshot process. Currently only supported on Windows instances using the Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS).
+  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#instantSnapshot&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#instantSnapshot for InstantSnapshot resources.
+  &quot;labelFingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fingerprint for the labels being applied to this InstantSnapshot, which is essentially a hash of the labels set used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a InstantSnapshot.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Labels to apply to this InstantSnapshot. These can be later modified by the setLabels method. Label values may be empty.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instant snapshot resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+  &quot;satisfiesPzs&quot;: True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource&#x27;s resource id.
+  &quot;sourceDisk&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL of the source disk used to create this instant snapshot. Note that the source disk must be in the same zone/region as the instant snapshot to be created. This can be a full or valid partial URL. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /disks/disk - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /disks/disk - projects/project/zones/zone/disks/disk - projects/project/regions/region/disks/disk - zones/zone/disks/disk - regions/region/disks/disk
+  &quot;sourceDiskId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The ID value of the disk used to create this InstantSnapshot. This value may be used to determine whether the InstantSnapshot was taken from the current or a previous instance of a given disk name.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the instantSnapshot. This can be CREATING, DELETING, FAILED, or READY.
+  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the zone where the instant snapshot resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
+        {
+          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(project, zone, filter=None, maxResults=None, orderBy=None, pageToken=None, returnPartialSuccess=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the list of InstantSnapshot resources contained within the specified zone.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  filter: string, A filter expression that filters resources listed in the response. The expression must specify the field name, a comparison operator, and the value that you want to use for filtering. The value must be a string, a number, or a boolean. The comparison operator must be either `=`, `!=`, `&gt;`, or `&lt;`. For example, if you are filtering Compute Engine instances, you can exclude instances named `example-instance` by specifying `name != example-instance`. You can also filter nested fields. For example, you could specify `scheduling.automaticRestart = false` to include instances only if they are not scheduled for automatic restarts. You can use filtering on nested fields to filter based on resource labels. To filter on multiple expressions, provide each separate expression within parentheses. For example: ``` (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Skylake&quot;) ``` By default, each expression is an `AND` expression. However, you can include `AND` and `OR` expressions explicitly. For example: ``` (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Skylake&quot;) OR (cpuPlatform = &quot;Intel Broadwell&quot;) AND (scheduling.automaticRestart = true) ```
+  maxResults: integer, The maximum number of results per page that should be returned. If the number of available results is larger than `maxResults`, Compute Engine returns a `nextPageToken` that can be used to get the next page of results in subsequent list requests. Acceptable values are `0` to `500`, inclusive. (Default: `500`)
+  orderBy: string, Sorts list results by a certain order. By default, results are returned in alphanumerical order based on the resource name. You can also sort results in descending order based on the creation timestamp using `orderBy=&quot;creationTimestamp desc&quot;`. This sorts results based on the `creationTimestamp` field in reverse chronological order (newest result first). Use this to sort resources like operations so that the newest operation is returned first. Currently, only sorting by `name` or `creationTimestamp desc` is supported.
+  pageToken: string, Specifies a page token to use. Set `pageToken` to the `nextPageToken` returned by a previous list request to get the next page of results.
+  returnPartialSuccess: boolean, Opt-in for partial success behavior which provides partial results in case of failure. The default value is false.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Contains a list of InstantSnapshot resources.
+  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Unique identifier for the resource; defined by the server.
+  &quot;items&quot;: [ # A list of InstantSnapshot resources.
+    { # Represents a InstantSnapshot resource. You can use instant snapshots to create disk rollback points quickly..
+      &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
+      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
+      &quot;diskSizeGb&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Size of the source disk, specified in GB.
+      &quot;guestFlush&quot;: True or False, # Whether to attempt an application consistent instant snapshot by informing the OS to prepare for the snapshot process. Currently only supported on Windows instances using the Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS).
+      &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the resource. This identifier is defined by the server.
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#instantSnapshot&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always compute#instantSnapshot for InstantSnapshot resources.
+      &quot;labelFingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A fingerprint for the labels being applied to this InstantSnapshot, which is essentially a hash of the labels set used for optimistic locking. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels, otherwise the request will fail with error 412 conditionNotMet. To see the latest fingerprint, make a get() request to retrieve a InstantSnapshot.
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Labels to apply to this InstantSnapshot. These can be later modified by the setLabels method. Label values may be empty.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the resource; provided by the client when the resource is created. The name must be 1-63 characters long, and comply with RFC1035. Specifically, the name must be 1-63 characters long and match the regular expression `[a-z]([-a-z0-9]*[a-z0-9])?` which means the first character must be a lowercase letter, and all following characters must be a dash, lowercase letter, or digit, except the last character, which cannot be a dash.
+      &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the region where the instant snapshot resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+      &quot;satisfiesPzs&quot;: True or False, # [Output Only] Reserved for future use.
+      &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+      &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource&#x27;s resource id.
+      &quot;sourceDisk&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URL of the source disk used to create this instant snapshot. Note that the source disk must be in the same zone/region as the instant snapshot to be created. This can be a full or valid partial URL. For example, the following are valid values: - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/zones/zone /disks/disk - https://www.googleapis.com/compute/v1/projects/project/regions/region /disks/disk - projects/project/zones/zone/disks/disk - projects/project/regions/region/disks/disk - zones/zone/disks/disk - regions/region/disks/disk
+      &quot;sourceDiskId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The ID value of the disk used to create this InstantSnapshot. This value may be used to determine whether the InstantSnapshot was taken from the current or a previous instance of a given disk name.
+      &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the instantSnapshot. This can be CREATING, DELETING, FAILED, or READY.
+      &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] URL of the zone where the instant snapshot resides. You must specify this field as part of the HTTP request URL. It is not settable as a field in the request body.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#instantSnapshotList&quot;, # Type of resource.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] This token allows you to get the next page of results for list requests. If the number of results is larger than maxResults, use the nextPageToken as a value for the query parameter pageToken in the next list request. Subsequent list requests will have their own nextPageToken to continue paging through the results.
+  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
+  &quot;warning&quot;: { # [Output Only] Informational warning message.
+    &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+    &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
+      {
+        &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+        &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(project, zone, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Flatten Policy to create a backwacd compatible wire-format. Deprecated. Use &#x27;policy&#x27; to specify bindings.
+    { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+      &quot;bindingId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Flatten Policy to create a backward compatible wire-format. Deprecated. Use &#x27;policy&#x27; to specify the etag.
+  &quot;policy&quot;: { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/). # REQUIRED: The complete policy to be applied to the &#x27;resource&#x27;. The size of the policy is limited to a few 10s of KB. An empty policy is in general a valid policy but certain services (like Projects) might reject them.
+    &quot;auditConfigs&quot;: [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
+      { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { &quot;audit_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;allServices&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;ADMIN_READ&quot; } ] }, { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;sampleservice.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:aliya@example.com&quot; ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging, and aliya@example.com from DATA_WRITE logging.
+        &quot;auditLogConfigs&quot;: [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
+          { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; } ] } This enables &#x27;DATA_READ&#x27; and &#x27;DATA_WRITE&#x27; logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
+            &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
+              &quot;A String&quot;,
+            ],
+            &quot;ignoreChildExemptions&quot;: True or False, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;logType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The log type that this config enables.
+          },
+        ],
+        &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;A String&quot;,
+        ],
+        &quot;service&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+      { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+        &quot;bindingId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+          &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+          &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+          &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+          &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+        },
+        &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+          &quot;A String&quot;,
+        ],
+        &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+    &quot;iamOwned&quot;: True or False, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+    &quot;rules&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;action&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;conditions&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;iam&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;svc&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;sys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;values&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              &quot;A String&quot;,
+            ],
+          },
+        ],
+        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;ins&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;A String&quot;,
+        ],
+        &quot;logConfigs&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;cloudAudit&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              &quot;authorizationLoggingOptions&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                &quot;permissionType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              },
+              &quot;logName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            },
+            &quot;counter&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              &quot;customFields&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                  &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                },
+              ],
+              &quot;field&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              &quot;metric&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            },
+            &quot;dataAccess&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              &quot;logMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            },
+          },
+        ],
+        &quot;notIns&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;A String&quot;,
+        ],
+        &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;A String&quot;,
+        ],
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+  },
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # An Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy, which specifies access controls for Google Cloud resources. A `Policy` is a collection of `bindings`. A `binding` binds one or more `members` to a single `role`. Members can be user accounts, service accounts, Google groups, and domains (such as G Suite). A `role` is a named list of permissions; each `role` can be an IAM predefined role or a user-created custom role. For some types of Google Cloud resources, a `binding` can also specify a `condition`, which is a logical expression that allows access to a resource only if the expression evaluates to `true`. A condition can add constraints based on attributes of the request, the resource, or both. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies). **JSON example:** { &quot;bindings&quot;: [ { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:mike@example.com&quot;, &quot;group:admins@example.com&quot;, &quot;domain:google.com&quot;, &quot;serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;role&quot;: &quot;roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer&quot;, &quot;members&quot;: [ &quot;user:eve@example.com&quot; ], &quot;condition&quot;: { &quot;title&quot;: &quot;expirable access&quot;, &quot;description&quot;: &quot;Does not grant access after Sep 2020&quot;, &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;)&quot;, } } ], &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;BwWWja0YfJA=&quot;, &quot;version&quot;: 3 } **YAML example:** bindings: - members: - user:mike@example.com - group:admins@example.com - domain:google.com - serviceAccount:my-project-id@appspot.gserviceaccount.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationAdmin - members: - user:eve@example.com role: roles/resourcemanager.organizationViewer condition: title: expirable access description: Does not grant access after Sep 2020 expression: request.time &lt; timestamp(&#x27;2020-10-01T00:00:00.000Z&#x27;) etag: BwWWja0YfJA= version: 3 For a description of IAM and its features, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/docs/).
+  &quot;auditConfigs&quot;: [ # Specifies cloud audit logging configuration for this policy.
+    { # Specifies the audit configuration for a service. The configuration determines which permission types are logged, and what identities, if any, are exempted from logging. An AuditConfig must have one or more AuditLogConfigs. If there are AuditConfigs for both `allServices` and a specific service, the union of the two AuditConfigs is used for that service: the log_types specified in each AuditConfig are enabled, and the exempted_members in each AuditLogConfig are exempted. Example Policy with multiple AuditConfigs: { &quot;audit_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;allServices&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;ADMIN_READ&quot; } ] }, { &quot;service&quot;: &quot;sampleservice.googleapis.com&quot;, &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot; }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:aliya@example.com&quot; ] } ] } ] } For sampleservice, this policy enables DATA_READ, DATA_WRITE and ADMIN_READ logging. It also exempts jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging, and aliya@example.com from DATA_WRITE logging.
+      &quot;auditLogConfigs&quot;: [ # The configuration for logging of each type of permission.
+        { # Provides the configuration for logging a type of permissions. Example: { &quot;audit_log_configs&quot;: [ { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_READ&quot;, &quot;exempted_members&quot;: [ &quot;user:jose@example.com&quot; ] }, { &quot;log_type&quot;: &quot;DATA_WRITE&quot; } ] } This enables &#x27;DATA_READ&#x27; and &#x27;DATA_WRITE&#x27; logging, while exempting jose@example.com from DATA_READ logging.
+          &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities that do not cause logging for this type of permission. Follows the same format of Binding.members.
+            &quot;A String&quot;,
+          ],
+          &quot;ignoreChildExemptions&quot;: True or False, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;logType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The log type that this config enables.
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;exemptedMembers&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;service&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a service that will be enabled for audit logging. For example, `storage.googleapis.com`, `cloudsql.googleapis.com`. `allServices` is a special value that covers all services.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;bindings&quot;: [ # Associates a list of `members` to a `role`. Optionally, may specify a `condition` that determines how and when the `bindings` are applied. Each of the `bindings` must contain at least one member.
+    { # Associates `members` with a `role`.
+      &quot;bindingId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;condition&quot;: { # Represents a textual expression in the Common Expression Language (CEL) syntax. CEL is a C-like expression language. The syntax and semantics of CEL are documented at https://github.com/google/cel-spec. Example (Comparison): title: &quot;Summary size limit&quot; description: &quot;Determines if a summary is less than 100 chars&quot; expression: &quot;document.summary.size() &lt; 100&quot; Example (Equality): title: &quot;Requestor is owner&quot; description: &quot;Determines if requestor is the document owner&quot; expression: &quot;document.owner == request.auth.claims.email&quot; Example (Logic): title: &quot;Public documents&quot; description: &quot;Determine whether the document should be publicly visible&quot; expression: &quot;document.type != &#x27;private&#x27; &amp;&amp; document.type != &#x27;internal&#x27;&quot; Example (Data Manipulation): title: &quot;Notification string&quot; description: &quot;Create a notification string with a timestamp.&quot; expression: &quot;&#x27;New message received at &#x27; + string(document.create_time)&quot; The exact variables and functions that may be referenced within an expression are determined by the service that evaluates it. See the service documentation for additional information. # The condition that is associated with this binding. If the condition evaluates to `true`, then this binding applies to the current request. If the condition evaluates to `false`, then this binding does not apply to the current request. However, a different role binding might grant the same role to one or more of the members in this binding. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+        &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Description of the expression. This is a longer text which describes the expression, e.g. when hovered over it in a UI.
+        &quot;expression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Textual representation of an expression in Common Expression Language syntax.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. String indicating the location of the expression for error reporting, e.g. a file name and a position in the file.
+        &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Title for the expression, i.e. a short string describing its purpose. This can be used e.g. in UIs which allow to enter the expression.
+      },
+      &quot;members&quot;: [ # Specifies the identities requesting access for a Cloud Platform resource. `members` can have the following values: * `allUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is on the internet; with or without a Google account. * `allAuthenticatedUsers`: A special identifier that represents anyone who is authenticated with a Google account or a service account. * `user:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a specific Google account. For example, `alice@example.com` . * `serviceAccount:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a service account. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com`. * `group:{emailid}`: An email address that represents a Google group. For example, `admins@example.com`. * `deleted:user:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a user that has been recently deleted. For example, `alice@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the user is recovered, this value reverts to `user:{emailid}` and the recovered user retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:serviceAccount:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a service account that has been recently deleted. For example, `my-other-app@appspot.gserviceaccount.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the service account is undeleted, this value reverts to `serviceAccount:{emailid}` and the undeleted service account retains the role in the binding. * `deleted:group:{emailid}?uid={uniqueid}`: An email address (plus unique identifier) representing a Google group that has been recently deleted. For example, `admins@example.com?uid=123456789012345678901`. If the group is recovered, this value reverts to `group:{emailid}` and the recovered group retains the role in the binding. * `domain:{domain}`: The G Suite domain (primary) that represents all the users of that domain. For example, `google.com` or `example.com`.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;role&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Role that is assigned to `members`. For example, `roles/viewer`, `roles/editor`, or `roles/owner`.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;etag&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # `etag` is used for optimistic concurrency control as a way to help prevent simultaneous updates of a policy from overwriting each other. It is strongly suggested that systems make use of the `etag` in the read-modify-write cycle to perform policy updates in order to avoid race conditions: An `etag` is returned in the response to `getIamPolicy`, and systems are expected to put that etag in the request to `setIamPolicy` to ensure that their change will be applied to the same version of the policy. **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost.
+  &quot;iamOwned&quot;: True or False, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+  &quot;rules&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+    { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;action&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;conditions&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;iam&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;svc&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;sys&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;values&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;A String&quot;,
+          ],
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+      &quot;ins&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;logConfigs&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          &quot;cloudAudit&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;authorizationLoggingOptions&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              &quot;permissionType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            },
+            &quot;logName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          },
+          &quot;counter&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;customFields&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+                &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+              },
+            ],
+            &quot;field&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;metric&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          },
+          &quot;dataAccess&quot;: { # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use. # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+            &quot;logMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+          },
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;notIns&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+      &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # This is deprecated and has no effect. Do not use.
+        &quot;A String&quot;,
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;version&quot;: 42, # Specifies the format of the policy. Valid values are `0`, `1`, and `3`. Requests that specify an invalid value are rejected. Any operation that affects conditional role bindings must specify version `3`. This requirement applies to the following operations: * Getting a policy that includes a conditional role binding * Adding a conditional role binding to a policy * Changing a conditional role binding in a policy * Removing any role binding, with or without a condition, from a policy that includes conditions **Important:** If you use IAM Conditions, you must include the `etag` field whenever you call `setIamPolicy`. If you omit this field, then IAM allows you to overwrite a version `3` policy with a version `1` policy, and all of the conditions in the version `3` policy are lost. If a policy does not include any conditions, operations on that policy may specify any valid version or leave the field unset. To learn which resources support conditions in their IAM policies, see the [IAM documentation](https://cloud.google.com/iam/help/conditions/resource-policies).
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="setLabels">setLabels(project, zone, resource, body=None, requestId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Sets the labels on a instantSnapshot in the given zone. To learn more about labels, read the Labeling Resources documentation.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  &quot;labelFingerprint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The fingerprint of the previous set of labels for this resource, used to detect conflicts. The fingerprint is initially generated by Compute Engine and changes after every request to modify or update labels. You must always provide an up-to-date fingerprint hash in order to update or change labels. Make a get() request to the resource to get the latest fingerprint.
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # The labels to set for this resource.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+}
+
+  requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents an Operation resource. Google Compute Engine has three Operation resources: * [Global](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/globalOperations) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionOperations) * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/zoneOperations) You can use an operation resource to manage asynchronous API requests. For more information, read Handling API responses. Operations can be global, regional or zonal. - For global operations, use the `globalOperations` resource. - For regional operations, use the `regionOperations` resource. - For zonal operations, use the `zonalOperations` resource. For more information, read Global, Regional, and Zonal Resources.
+  &quot;clientOperationId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The value of `requestId` if you provided it in the request. Not present otherwise.
+  &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Deprecated] This field is deprecated.
+  &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A textual description of the operation, which is set when the operation is created.
+  &quot;endTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was completed. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # [Output Only] If errors are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    &quot;errors&quot;: [ # [Output Only] The array of errors encountered while processing this operation.
+      {
+        &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The error type identifier for this error.
+        &quot;location&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Indicates the field in the request that caused the error. This property is optional.
+        &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional, human-readable error message.
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  &quot;httpErrorMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error message that was returned, such as `NOT FOUND`.
+  &quot;httpErrorStatusCode&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] If the operation fails, this field contains the HTTP error status code that was returned. For example, a `404` means the resource was not found.
+  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique identifier for the operation. This identifier is defined by the server.
+  &quot;insertTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was requested. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;compute#operation&quot;, # [Output Only] Type of the resource. Always `compute#operation` for Operation resources.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Name of the operation.
+  &quot;operationGroupId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An ID that represents a group of operations, such as when a group of operations results from a `bulkInsert` API request.
+  &quot;operationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The type of operation, such as `insert`, `update`, or `delete`, and so on.
+  &quot;progress&quot;: 42, # [Output Only] An optional progress indicator that ranges from 0 to 100. There is no requirement that this be linear or support any granularity of operations. This should not be used to guess when the operation will be complete. This number should monotonically increase as the operation progresses.
+  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the region where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing regional operations.
+  &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for the resource.
+  &quot;selfLinkWithId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource with the resource id.
+  &quot;startTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The time that this operation was started by the server. This value is in RFC3339 text format.
+  &quot;status&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The status of the operation, which can be one of the following: `PENDING`, `RUNNING`, or `DONE`.
+  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] An optional textual description of the current status of the operation.
+  &quot;targetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The unique target ID, which identifies a specific incarnation of the target resource.
+  &quot;targetLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the resource that the operation modifies. For operations related to creating a snapshot, this points to the persistent disk that the snapshot was created from.
+  &quot;user&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] User who requested the operation, for example: `user@example.com`.
+  &quot;warnings&quot;: [ # [Output Only] If warning messages are generated during processing of the operation, this field will be populated.
+    {
+      &quot;code&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning code, if applicable. For example, Compute Engine returns NO_RESULTS_ON_PAGE if there are no results in the response.
+      &quot;data&quot;: [ # [Output Only] Metadata about this warning in key: value format. For example: &quot;data&quot;: [ { &quot;key&quot;: &quot;scope&quot;, &quot;value&quot;: &quot;zones/us-east1-d&quot; }
+        {
+          &quot;key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A key that provides more detail on the warning being returned. For example, for warnings where there are no results in a list request for a particular zone, this key might be scope and the key value might be the zone name. Other examples might be a key indicating a deprecated resource and a suggested replacement, or a warning about invalid network settings (for example, if an instance attempts to perform IP forwarding but is not enabled for IP forwarding).
+          &quot;value&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A warning data value corresponding to the key.
+        },
+      ],
+      &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] A human-readable description of the warning code.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;zone&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] The URL of the zone where the operation resides. Only applicable when performing per-zone operations.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="testIamPermissions">testIamPermissions(project, zone, resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Returns permissions that a caller has on the specified resource.
+
+Args:
+  project: string, Project ID for this request. (required)
+  zone: string, The name of the zone for this request. (required)
+  resource: string, Name or id of the resource for this request. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{
+  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # The set of permissions to check for the &#x27;resource&#x27;. Permissions with wildcards (such as &#x27;*&#x27; or &#x27;storage.*&#x27;) are not allowed.
+    &quot;A String&quot;,
+  ],
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  &quot;permissions&quot;: [ # A subset of `TestPermissionsRequest.permissions` that the caller is allowed.
+    &quot;A String&quot;,
+  ],
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html
index d0af63f..8761f8d 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_alpha.regionDisks.html
@@ -411,7 +411,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -613,7 +613,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -780,7 +780,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
       &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
         &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
         &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
         &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -1372,7 +1372,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/alpha/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.disks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.disks.html
index 576b789..38e5b07 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.disks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.disks.html
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@
         { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
           &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
           &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-          &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+          &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
             &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
             &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
             &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -557,7 +557,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -754,7 +754,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -915,7 +915,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
       &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
         &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
         &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
         &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -1499,7 +1499,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
index 9d85df5..f63bb14 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instanceTemplates.html
@@ -383,6 +383,7 @@
     &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
       &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
       &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+      &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
       &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
       &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
       &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -398,6 +399,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
       &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
     },
     &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
       { # A service account.
@@ -750,6 +752,7 @@
     &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
       &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
       &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+      &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
       &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
       &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
       &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -765,6 +768,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
       &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
     },
     &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
       { # A service account.
@@ -1081,6 +1085,7 @@
         &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
           &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
           &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+          &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
           &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
           &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
           &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -1096,6 +1101,7 @@
           ],
           &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
           &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+          &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
         },
         &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
           { # A service account.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html
index 58c9b40..a9c8c34 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.instances.html
@@ -618,6 +618,7 @@
           &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Sets the scheduling options for this instance.
             &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
             &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+            &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
             &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
             &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
             &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -633,6 +634,7 @@
             ],
             &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
             &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+            &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
           },
           &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
           &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts, with their specified scopes, authorized for this instance. Only one service account per VM instance is supported. Service accounts generate access tokens that can be accessed through the metadata server and used to authenticate applications on the instance. See Service Accounts for more information.
@@ -1088,6 +1090,7 @@
     &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
       &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
       &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+      &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
       &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
       &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
       &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -1103,6 +1106,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
       &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
     },
     &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
       { # A service account.
@@ -1624,6 +1628,7 @@
   &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Sets the scheduling options for this instance.
     &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
     &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+    &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
     &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
     &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
     &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -1639,6 +1644,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
     &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+    &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
   },
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
   &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts, with their specified scopes, authorized for this instance. Only one service account per VM instance is supported. Service accounts generate access tokens that can be accessed through the metadata server and used to authenticate applications on the instance. See Service Accounts for more information.
@@ -2342,6 +2348,7 @@
   &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Sets the scheduling options for this instance.
     &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
     &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+    &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
     &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
     &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
     &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -2357,6 +2364,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
     &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+    &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
   },
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
   &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts, with their specified scopes, authorized for this instance. Only one service account per VM instance is supported. Service accounts generate access tokens that can be accessed through the metadata server and used to authenticate applications on the instance. See Service Accounts for more information.
@@ -2690,6 +2698,7 @@
       &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Sets the scheduling options for this instance.
         &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
         &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+        &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
         &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
         &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
         &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -2705,6 +2714,7 @@
         ],
         &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
         &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+        &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
       },
       &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
       &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts, with their specified scopes, authorized for this instance. Only one service account per VM instance is supported. Service accounts generate access tokens that can be accessed through the metadata server and used to authenticate applications on the instance. See Service Accounts for more information.
@@ -3882,6 +3892,7 @@
 { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21
   &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
   &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+  &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
   &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
   &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
   &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -3897,6 +3908,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
   &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+  &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
 }
 
   requestId: string, An optional request ID to identify requests. Specify a unique request ID so that if you must retry your request, the server will know to ignore the request if it has already been completed. For example, consider a situation where you make an initial request and the request times out. If you make the request again with the same request ID, the server can check if original operation with the same request ID was received, and if so, will ignore the second request. This prevents clients from accidentally creating duplicate commitments. The request ID must be a valid UUID with the exception that zero UUID is not supported ( 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000).
@@ -4832,6 +4844,7 @@
   &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Sets the scheduling options for this instance.
     &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
     &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+    &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
     &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
     &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
     &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -4847,6 +4860,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
     &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+    &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
   },
   &quot;selfLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Server-defined URL for this resource.
   &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts, with their specified scopes, authorized for this instance. Only one service account per VM instance is supported. Service accounts generate access tokens that can be accessed through the metadata server and used to authenticate applications on the instance. See Service Accounts for more information.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html
index 2a76a3a..a096768 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.machineImages.html
@@ -322,6 +322,7 @@
     &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from this machine image.
       &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
       &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+      &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
       &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
       &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
       &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -337,6 +338,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
       &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
     },
     &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
       { # A service account.
@@ -611,6 +613,7 @@
     &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from this machine image.
       &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
       &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+      &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
       &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
       &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
       &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -626,6 +629,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
       &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
     },
     &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
       { # A service account.
@@ -865,6 +869,7 @@
         &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from this machine image.
           &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
           &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+          &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
           &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
           &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
           &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -880,6 +885,7 @@
           ],
           &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
           &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+          &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
         },
         &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from this machine image. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
           { # A service account.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionDisks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionDisks.html
index f95d345..305cf55 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionDisks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionDisks.html
@@ -399,7 +399,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -596,7 +596,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -757,7 +757,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
       &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
         &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
         &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
         &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/beta/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html
index 00cc447..edef7f4 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_beta.regionInstances.html
@@ -285,6 +285,7 @@
     &quot;scheduling&quot;: { # Sets the scheduling options for an Instance. NextID: 21 # Specifies the scheduling options for the instances that are created from these properties.
       &quot;automaticRestart&quot;: True or False, # Specifies whether the instance should be automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine (not terminated by a user). You can only set the automatic restart option for standard instances. Preemptible instances cannot be automatically restarted. By default, this is set to true so an instance is automatically restarted if it is terminated by Compute Engine.
       &quot;hostErrorTimeoutSeconds&quot;: 42, # Specify the time in seconds for host error detection, the value must be within the range of [90, 330] with the increment of 30, if unset, the default behavior of host error recovery will be used.
+      &quot;instanceTerminationAction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the termination action for the instance.
       &quot;locationHint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque location hint used to place the instance close to other resources. This field is for use by internal tools that use the public API.
       &quot;maintenanceFreezeDurationHours&quot;: 42, # Specifies the number of hours after VM instance creation where the VM won&#x27;t be scheduled for maintenance.
       &quot;maintenanceInterval&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # For more information about maintenance intervals, see Setting maintenance intervals.
@@ -300,6 +301,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;onHostMaintenance&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Defines the maintenance behavior for this instance. For standard instances, the default behavior is MIGRATE. For preemptible instances, the default and only possible behavior is TERMINATE. For more information, see Setting Instance Scheduling Options.
       &quot;preemptible&quot;: True or False, # Defines whether the instance is preemptible. This can only be set during instance creation or while the instance is stopped and therefore, in a `TERMINATED` state. See Instance Life Cycle for more information on the possible instance states.
+      &quot;provisioningModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the provisioning model of the instance.
     },
     &quot;serviceAccounts&quot;: [ # A list of service accounts with specified scopes. Access tokens for these service accounts are available to the instances that are created from these properties. Use metadata queries to obtain the access tokens for these instances.
       { # A service account.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html
index eeff38e..92d2c80 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.disks.html
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@
         { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
           &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
           &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-          &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+          &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
             &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
             &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
             &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -731,7 +731,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -884,7 +884,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
       &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
         &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
         &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
         &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionDisks.html b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionDisks.html
index 3546fe8..d40f28c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionDisks.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/compute_v1.regionDisks.html
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -581,7 +581,7 @@
 { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
   &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
   &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+  &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
     &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
     &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
     &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
@@ -734,7 +734,7 @@
     { # Represents a Persistent Disk resource. Google Compute Engine has two Disk resources: * [Zonal](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/disks) * [Regional](/compute/docs/reference/rest/v1/regionDisks) Persistent disks are required for running your VM instances. Create both boot and non-boot (data) persistent disks. For more information, read Persistent Disks. For more storage options, read Storage options. The disks resource represents a zonal persistent disk. For more information, read Zonal persistent disks. The regionDisks resource represents a regional persistent disk. For more information, read Regional resources.
       &quot;creationTimestamp&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # [Output Only] Creation timestamp in RFC3339 text format.
       &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An optional description of this resource. Provide this property when you create the resource.
-      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later (e.g. to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine). Customer-supplied encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk will be encrypted using an automatically generated key and you do not need to provide a key to use the disk later.
+      &quot;diskEncryptionKey&quot;: { # Encrypts the disk using a customer-supplied encryption key or a customer-managed encryption key. Encryption keys do not protect access to metadata of the disk. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-supplied key, you must provide the same key if you use the disk later. For example, to create a disk snapshot, to create a disk image, to create a machine image, or to attach the disk to a virtual machine. After you encrypt a disk with a customer-managed key, the diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName is set to a key *version* name once the disk is created. The disk is encrypted with this version of the key. In the response, diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName appears in the following format: &quot;diskEncryptionKey.kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;projects/kms_project_id/locations/region/keyRings/ key_region/cryptoKeys/key /cryptoKeysVersions/version If you do not provide an encryption key when creating the disk, then the disk is encrypted using an automatically generated key and you don&#x27;t need to provide a key to use the disk later.
         &quot;kmsKeyName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the encryption key that is stored in Google Cloud KMS.
         &quot;kmsKeyServiceAccount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The service account being used for the encryption request for the given KMS key. If absent, the Compute Engine default service account is used.
         &quot;rawKey&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies a 256-bit customer-supplied encryption key, encoded in RFC 4648 base64 to either encrypt or decrypt this resource.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.conversations.analyses.html b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.conversations.analyses.html
index fde9011..e628ee0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.conversations.analyses.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.conversations.analyses.html
@@ -172,6 +172,7 @@
         &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
         &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
           { # Information about the issue.
+            &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
             &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
             &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
           },
@@ -326,6 +327,7 @@
         &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
         &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
           { # Information about the issue.
+            &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
             &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
             &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
           },
@@ -439,6 +441,7 @@
             &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
             &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
               { # Information about the issue.
+                &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
                 &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
                 &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
               },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.conversations.html b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.conversations.html
index 4c7bba3..32bcdbe 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.conversations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.conversations.html
@@ -251,6 +251,7 @@
           &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
           &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
             { # Information about the issue.
+              &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
               &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
               &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
             },
@@ -471,6 +472,7 @@
           &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
           &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
             { # Information about the issue.
+              &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
               &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
               &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
             },
@@ -721,6 +723,7 @@
           &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
           &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
             { # Information about the issue.
+              &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
               &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
               &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
             },
@@ -847,7 +850,7 @@
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The parent resource of the conversation. (required)
   filter: string, A filter to reduce results to a specific subset. Useful for querying conversations with specific properties.
-  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of conversations to return in the response. If this value is zero, the service will select a default size. A call might return fewer objects than requested. A non-empty `next_page_token` in the response indicates that more data is available.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of conversations to return in the response. A valid page size ranges from 0 to 1,000 inclusive. If the page size is zero or unspecified, a default page size of 100 will be chosen. Note that a call might return fewer results than the requested page size.
   pageToken: string, The value returned by the last `ListConversationsResponse`. This value indicates that this is a continuation of a prior `ListConversations` call and that the system should return the next page of data.
   view: string, The level of details of the conversation. Default is `BASIC`.
     Allowed values
@@ -957,6 +960,7 @@
               &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
               &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
                 { # Information about the issue.
+                  &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
                   &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
                   &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
                 },
@@ -1075,7 +1079,7 @@
       &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The most recent time at which the conversation was updated.
     },
   ],
-  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A token, which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A token which can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is set, it means there is another page available. If it is not set, it means no other pages are available.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
@@ -1195,6 +1199,7 @@
           &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
           &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
             { # Information about the issue.
+              &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
               &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
               &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
             },
@@ -1415,6 +1420,7 @@
           &quot;issueModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Issue model that generates the result.
           &quot;issues&quot;: [ # All the matched issues.
             { # Information about the issue.
+              &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Display name of the assigned issue. This field is set at time of analyis and immutable since then.
               &quot;issue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Resource name of the assigned issue.
               &quot;score&quot;: 3.14, # Score indicating the likelihood of the issue assignment. currently bounded on [0,1].
             },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.issueModels.html b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.issueModels.html
index 2ef45d3..a6ea991 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.issueModels.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/contactcenterinsights_v1.projects.locations.issueModels.html
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which this issue model was created.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The representative name for the issue model.
   &quot;inputDataConfig&quot;: { # Configs for the input data used to create the issue model. # Configs for the input data that used to create the issue model.
-    &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Medium of conversations used in training data.
+    &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required.
     &quot;trainingConversationsCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Number of conversations used in training. Output only.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name of the issue model. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/issueModels/{issue_model}
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which this issue model was created.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The representative name for the issue model.
   &quot;inputDataConfig&quot;: { # Configs for the input data used to create the issue model. # Configs for the input data that used to create the issue model.
-    &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Medium of conversations used in training data.
+    &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required.
     &quot;trainingConversationsCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Number of conversations used in training. Output only.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name of the issue model. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/issueModels/{issue_model}
@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@
       &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which this issue model was created.
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The representative name for the issue model.
       &quot;inputDataConfig&quot;: { # Configs for the input data used to create the issue model. # Configs for the input data that used to create the issue model.
-        &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Medium of conversations used in training data.
+        &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required.
         &quot;trainingConversationsCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Number of conversations used in training. Output only.
       },
       &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name of the issue model. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/issueModels/{issue_model}
@@ -368,7 +368,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which this issue model was created.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The representative name for the issue model.
   &quot;inputDataConfig&quot;: { # Configs for the input data used to create the issue model. # Configs for the input data that used to create the issue model.
-    &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Medium of conversations used in training data.
+    &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required.
     &quot;trainingConversationsCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Number of conversations used in training. Output only.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name of the issue model. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/issueModels/{issue_model}
@@ -399,7 +399,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which this issue model was created.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The representative name for the issue model.
   &quot;inputDataConfig&quot;: { # Configs for the input data used to create the issue model. # Configs for the input data that used to create the issue model.
-    &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Medium of conversations used in training data.
+    &quot;medium&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required.
     &quot;trainingConversationsCount&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Number of conversations used in training. Output only.
   },
   &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. The resource name of the issue model. Format: projects/{project}/locations/{location}/issueModels/{issue_model}
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
index fbb296f..600aa9e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.locations.clusters.html
@@ -249,6 +249,9 @@
       &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
         &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
       },
+      &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+        &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+      },
       &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
         &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
       },
@@ -900,6 +903,9 @@
     &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
       &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
     },
+    &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+    },
     &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
       &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
     },
@@ -1454,6 +1460,9 @@
         &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
           &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
         },
+        &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+          &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+        },
         &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
           &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
         },
@@ -1968,6 +1977,9 @@
     &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
       &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
     },
+    &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+    },
     &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
       &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
     },
@@ -2824,6 +2836,9 @@
       &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
         &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
       },
+      &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+        &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+      },
       &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
         &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
index a3cdc1a..ba33ce7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/container_v1beta1.projects.zones.clusters.html
@@ -160,6 +160,9 @@
     &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
       &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
     },
+    &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+    },
     &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
       &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
     },
@@ -357,6 +360,9 @@
       &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
         &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
       },
+      &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+        &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+      },
       &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
         &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
       },
@@ -1008,6 +1014,9 @@
     &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
       &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
     },
+    &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+      &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+    },
     &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
       &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
     },
@@ -1606,6 +1615,9 @@
         &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
           &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
         },
+        &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+          &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+        },
         &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
           &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
         },
@@ -2885,6 +2897,9 @@
       &quot;gcePersistentDiskCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the Compute Engine PD CSI driver. # Configuration for the Compute Engine Persistent Disk CSI driver.
         &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Compute Engine PD CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
       },
+      &quot;gcpFilestoreCsiDriverConfig&quot;: { # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver. # Configuration for the GCP Filestore CSI driver.
+        &quot;enabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the GCP Filestore CSI driver is enabled for this cluster.
+      },
       &quot;horizontalPodAutoscaling&quot;: { # Configuration options for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods. # Configuration for the horizontal pod autoscaling feature, which increases or decreases the number of replica pods a replication controller has based on the resource usage of the existing pods.
         &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # Whether the Horizontal Pod Autoscaling feature is enabled in the cluster. When enabled, it ensures that metrics are collected into Stackdriver Monitoring.
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html
index 3e9ad0a..7829904 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.notes.occurrences.html
@@ -138,13 +138,17 @@
           },
           &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
             &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-              &quot;A String&quot;,
+              {
+                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+              },
             ],
             &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
             &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-            &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-            },
+            &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+              {
+                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+              },
+            ],
             &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
           },
         },
@@ -390,13 +394,17 @@
             },
             &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
               &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-                &quot;A String&quot;,
+                {
+                  &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+                },
               ],
               &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
               &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-              &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-              },
+              &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+                {
+                  &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+                },
+              ],
               &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
             },
           },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html
index 438770f..337f2ae 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.projects.occurrences.html
@@ -154,13 +154,17 @@
       },
       &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
         &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-          &quot;A String&quot;,
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
         ],
         &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
         &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-        &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-        },
+        &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
       },
     },
@@ -406,13 +410,17 @@
         },
         &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
           &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-            &quot;A String&quot;,
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
           ],
           &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
           &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-          &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-          },
+          &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
         },
       },
@@ -606,13 +614,17 @@
       },
       &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
         &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-          &quot;A String&quot;,
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
         ],
         &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
         &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-        &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-        },
+        &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
       },
     },
@@ -858,13 +870,17 @@
         },
         &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
           &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-            &quot;A String&quot;,
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
           ],
           &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
           &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-          &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-          },
+          &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
         },
       },
@@ -1082,13 +1098,17 @@
       },
       &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
         &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-          &quot;A String&quot;,
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
         ],
         &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
         &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-        &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-        },
+        &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
       },
     },
@@ -1334,13 +1354,17 @@
         },
         &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
           &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-            &quot;A String&quot;,
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
           ],
           &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
           &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-          &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-          },
+          &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
         },
       },
@@ -1837,13 +1861,17 @@
           },
           &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
             &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-              &quot;A String&quot;,
+              {
+                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+              },
             ],
             &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
             &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-            &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-            },
+            &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+              {
+                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+              },
+            ],
             &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
           },
         },
@@ -2089,13 +2117,17 @@
             },
             &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
               &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-                &quot;A String&quot;,
+                {
+                  &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+                },
               ],
               &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
               &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-              &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-              },
+              &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+                {
+                  &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+                },
+              ],
               &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
             },
           },
@@ -2306,13 +2338,17 @@
       },
       &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
         &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-          &quot;A String&quot;,
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
         ],
         &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
         &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-        &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-        },
+        &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
       },
     },
@@ -2558,13 +2594,17 @@
         },
         &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
           &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-            &quot;A String&quot;,
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
           ],
           &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
           &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-          &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-          },
+          &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
         },
       },
@@ -2758,13 +2798,17 @@
       },
       &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
         &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-          &quot;A String&quot;,
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
         ],
         &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
         &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-        &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-        },
+        &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+          {
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+          },
+        ],
         &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
       },
     },
@@ -3010,13 +3054,17 @@
         },
         &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
           &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-            &quot;A String&quot;,
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
           ],
           &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
           &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-          &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-            &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-          },
+          &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+            {
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+            },
+          ],
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
         },
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html
index 2e2c9b7..c596be2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/containeranalysis_v1alpha1.providers.notes.occurrences.html
@@ -138,13 +138,17 @@
           },
           &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
             &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-              &quot;A String&quot;,
+              {
+                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+              },
             ],
             &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
             &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-            &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-              &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-            },
+            &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+              {
+                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+              },
+            ],
             &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
           },
         },
@@ -390,13 +394,17 @@
             },
             &quot;recipe&quot;: { # Steps taken to build the artifact. For a TaskRun, typically each container corresponds to one step in the recipe. # Identifies the configuration used for the build. When combined with materials, this SHOULD fully describe the build, such that re-running this recipe results in bit-for-bit identical output (if the build is reproducible). required
               &quot;arguments&quot;: [ # Collection of all external inputs that influenced the build on top of recipe.definedInMaterial and recipe.entryPoint. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this might be the flags passed to make aside from the target, which is captured in recipe.entryPoint.
-                &quot;A String&quot;,
+                {
+                  &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+                },
               ],
               &quot;definedInMaterial&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Index in materials containing the recipe steps that are not implied by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would point to the source containing the Makefile, not the make program itself. Set to -1 if the recipe doesn&#x27;t come from a material, as zero is default unset value for int64.
               &quot;entryPoint&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String identifying the entry point into the build. This is often a path to a configuration file and/or a target label within that file. The syntax and meaning are defined by recipe.type. For example, if the recipe type were &quot;make&quot;, then this would reference the directory in which to run make as well as which target to use.
-              &quot;environment&quot;: { # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
-                &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
-              },
+              &quot;environment&quot;: [ # Any other builder-controlled inputs necessary for correctly evaluating the recipe. Usually only needed for reproducing the build but not evaluated as part of policy.
+                {
+                  &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+                },
+              ],
               &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # URI indicating what type of recipe was performed. It determines the meaning of recipe.entryPoint, recipe.arguments, recipe.environment, and materials.
             },
           },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.html
index 1b7fe52..ff70feb 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.html
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@
   <pre>Creates an entry. You can create entries only with &#x27;FILESET&#x27;, &#x27;CLUSTER&#x27;, &#x27;DATA_STREAM&#x27;, or custom types. Data Catalog automatically creates entries with other types during metadata ingestion from integrated systems. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `parent` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project). An entry group can have a maximum of 100,000 entries.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The name of the entry group this entry belongs to. Note: The entry itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the entry group this entry belongs to. Note: The entry itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -356,7 +356,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes an existing entry. You can delete only the entries created by the CreateEntry method. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the entry to delete.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the entry to delete. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -374,7 +374,7 @@
   <pre>Gets an entry.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the entry to get.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the entry to get. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -689,7 +689,7 @@
   <pre>Updates an existing entry. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `entry.name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Output only. The resource name of an entry in URL format. Note: The entry itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  name: string, Output only. The resource name of an entry in URL format. Note: The entry itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.tags.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.tags.html
index 0dc1de4..a1d2f3e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.tags.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.tags.html
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@
   <pre>Creates a tag and assigns it to: * An Entry if the method name is ``projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.tags.create``. * Or EntryGroupif the method name is ``projects.locations.entryGroups.tags.create``. Note: The project identified by the `parent` parameter for the [tag] (https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.tags/create#path-parameters) and the [tag template] (https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.tagTemplates/create#path-parameters) used to create the tag must be in the same organization.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The name of the resource to attach this tag to. Tags can be attached to entries or entry groups. An entry can have up to 1000 attached tags. Note: The tag and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the resource to attach this tag to. Tags can be attached to entries or entry groups. An entry can have up to 1000 attached tags. Note: The tag and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes a tag.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the tag to delete.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tag to delete. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@
   <pre>Lists tags assigned to an Entry.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The name of the Data Catalog resource to list the tags of. The resource can be an Entry or an EntryGroup (without `/entries/{entries}` at the end).  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the Data Catalog resource to list the tags of. The resource can be an Entry or an EntryGroup (without `/entries/{entries}` at the end). (required)
   pageSize: integer, The maximum number of tags to return. Default is 10. Maximum limit is 1000.
   pageToken: string, Pagination token that specifies the next page to return. If empty, the first page is returned.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@
   <pre>Updates an existing tag.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the tag in URL format where tag ID is a system-generated identifier. Note: The tag itself might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  name: string, The resource name of the tag in URL format where tag ID is a system-generated identifier. Note: The tag itself might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.html
index ab51362..8cb0586 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.html
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@
   <pre>Creates an entry group. An entry group contains logically related entries together with [Cloud Identity and Access Management](/data-catalog/docs/concepts/iam) policies. These policies specify users who can create, edit, and view entries within entry groups. Data Catalog automatically creates entry groups with names that start with the `@` symbol for the following resources: * BigQuery entries (`@bigquery`) * Pub/Sub topics (`@pubsub`) * Dataproc Metastore services (`@dataproc_metastore_{SERVICE_NAME_HASH}`) You can create your own entry groups for Cloud Storage fileset entries and custom entries together with the corresponding IAM policies. User-created entry groups can&#x27;t contain the `@` symbol, it is reserved for automatically created groups. Entry groups, like entries, can be searched. A maximum of 10,000 entry groups may be created per organization across all locations. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `parent` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The names of the project and location that the new entry group belongs to. Note: The entry group itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The names of the project and location that the new entry group belongs to. Note: The entry group itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes an entry group. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the entry group to delete.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the entry group to delete. (required)
   force: boolean, Optional. If true, deletes all entries in the entry group.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@
   <pre>Gets an entry group.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the entry group to get.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the entry group to get. (required)
   readMask: string, The fields to return. If empty or omitted, all fields are returned.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@
   <pre>Updates an entry group. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `entry_group.name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the entry group in URL format. Note: The entry group itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  name: string, The resource name of the entry group in URL format. Note: The entry group itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.tags.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.tags.html
index e302a4b..48ac2ba 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.tags.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.entryGroups.tags.html
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@
   <pre>Creates a tag and assigns it to: * An Entry if the method name is ``projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.tags.create``. * Or EntryGroupif the method name is ``projects.locations.entryGroups.tags.create``. Note: The project identified by the `parent` parameter for the [tag] (https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.entryGroups.entries.tags/create#path-parameters) and the [tag template] (https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/reference/rest/v1/projects.locations.tagTemplates/create#path-parameters) used to create the tag must be in the same organization.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The name of the resource to attach this tag to. Tags can be attached to entries or entry groups. An entry can have up to 1000 attached tags. Note: The tag and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the resource to attach this tag to. Tags can be attached to entries or entry groups. An entry can have up to 1000 attached tags. Note: The tag and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes a tag.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the tag to delete.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tag to delete. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@
   <pre>Lists tags assigned to an Entry.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The name of the Data Catalog resource to list the tags of. The resource can be an Entry or an EntryGroup (without `/entries/{entries}` at the end).  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the Data Catalog resource to list the tags of. The resource can be an Entry or an EntryGroup (without `/entries/{entries}` at the end). (required)
   pageSize: integer, The maximum number of tags to return. Default is 10. Maximum limit is 1000.
   pageToken: string, Pagination token that specifies the next page to return. If empty, the first page is returned.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@
   <pre>Updates an existing tag.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the tag in URL format where tag ID is a system-generated identifier. Note: The tag itself might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  name: string, The resource name of the tag in URL format where tag ID is a system-generated identifier. Note: The tag itself might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.fields.enumValues.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.fields.enumValues.html
index 6847053..6f6e631 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.fields.enumValues.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.fields.enumValues.html
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@
   <pre>Renames an enum value in a tag template. Within a single enum field, enum values must be unique.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the enum field value.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the enum field value. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.fields.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.fields.html
index 1aa4e52..80f4838 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.fields.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.fields.html
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@
   <pre>Creates a field in a tag template. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `parent` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The name of the project and the template location [region](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/regions).  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the project and the template location [region](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/regions). (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes a field in a tag template and all uses of this field from the tags based on this template. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template field to delete.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template field to delete. (required)
   force: boolean, Required. If true, deletes this field from any tags that use it. Currently, `true` is the only supported value.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -179,7 +179,7 @@
   <pre>Updates a field in a tag template. You can&#x27;t update the field type with this method. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template field.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template field. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@
   <pre>Renames a field in a tag template. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project] (https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.html
index 6232511..44b06ec 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.tagTemplates.html
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
   <pre>Creates a tag template. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `parent` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project] (https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. The name of the project and the template location [region](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/regions).  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. The name of the project and the template location [region](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/regions). (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes a tag template and all tags that use it. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template to delete.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template to delete. (required)
   force: boolean, Required. If true, deletes all tags that use this template. Currently, `true` is the only supported value.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@
   <pre>Gets a tag template.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template to get.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. The name of the tag template to get. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@
   <pre>Updates a tag template. You can&#x27;t update template fields with this method. These fields are separate resources with their own create, update, and delete methods. You must enable the Data Catalog API in the project identified by the `tag_template.name` parameter. For more information, see [Data Catalog resource project](https://cloud.google.com/data-catalog/docs/concepts/resource-project).
 
 Args:
-  name: string, The resource name of the tag template in URL format. Note: The tag template itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name.  (required)
+  name: string, The resource name of the tag template in URL format. Note: The tag template itself and its child resources might not be stored in the location specified in its name. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.taxonomies.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.taxonomies.html
index 86f364a..acc3b1f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.taxonomies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.taxonomies.html
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@
   <pre>Creates a taxonomy in a specified project. The taxonomy is initially empty, that is, it doesn&#x27;t contain policy tags.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the project that the taxonomy will belong to.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the project that the taxonomy will belong to. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes a taxonomy, including all policy tags in this taxonomy, their associated policies, and the policy tags references from BigQuery columns.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. Resource name of the taxonomy to delete. Note: All policy tags in this taxonomy are also deleted.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. Resource name of the taxonomy to delete. Note: All policy tags in this taxonomy are also deleted. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@
   <pre>Exports taxonomies in the requested type and returns them, including their policy tags. The requested taxonomies must belong to the same project. This method generates `SerializedTaxonomy` protocol buffers with nested policy tags that can be used as input for `ImportTaxonomies` calls.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the project that the exported taxonomies belong to.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the project that the exported taxonomies belong to. (required)
   serializedTaxonomies: boolean, Serialized export taxonomies that contain all the policy tags as nested protocol buffers.
   taxonomies: string, Required. Resource names of the taxonomies to export. (repeated)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@
   <pre>Gets a taxonomy.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. Resource name of the taxonomy to get.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. Resource name of the taxonomy to get. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@
   <pre>Creates new taxonomies (including their policy tags) in a given project by importing from inlined or cross-regional sources. For a cross-regional source, new taxonomies are created by copying from a source in another region. For an inlined source, taxonomies and policy tags are created in bulk using nested protocol buffer structures.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. Resource name of project that the imported taxonomies will belong to.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. Resource name of project that the imported taxonomies will belong to. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -371,7 +371,7 @@
   <pre>Lists all taxonomies in a project in a particular location that you have a permission to view.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the project to list the taxonomies of.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the project to list the taxonomies of. (required)
   pageSize: integer, The maximum number of items to return. Must be a value between 1 and 1000 inclusively. If not set, defaults to 50.
   pageToken: string, The pagination token of the next results page. If not set, the first page is returned. The token is returned in the response to a previous list request.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -422,7 +422,7 @@
   <pre>Updates a taxonomy, including its display name, description, and activated policy types.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Output only. Resource name of this taxonomy in URL format. Note: Policy tag manager generates unique taxonomy IDs.  (required)
+  name: string, Output only. Resource name of this taxonomy in URL format. Note: Policy tag manager generates unique taxonomy IDs. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.taxonomies.policyTags.html b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.taxonomies.policyTags.html
index 3e4d134..e5a7621 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.taxonomies.policyTags.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datacatalog_v1.projects.locations.taxonomies.policyTags.html
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@
   <pre>Creates a policy tag in a taxonomy.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the taxonomy that the policy tag will belong to.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the taxonomy that the policy tag will belong to. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@
   <pre>Deletes a policy tag together with the following: * All of its descendant policy tags, if any * Policies associated with the policy tag and its descendants * References from BigQuery table schema of the policy tag and its descendants
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. Resource name of the policy tag to delete. Note: All of its descendant policy tags are also deleted.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. Resource name of the policy tag to delete. Note: All of its descendant policy tags are also deleted. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@
   <pre>Gets a policy tag.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Required. Resource name of the policy tag.  (required)
+  name: string, Required. Resource name of the policy tag. (required)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@
   <pre>Lists all policy tags in a taxonomy.
 
 Args:
-  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the taxonomy to list the policy tags of.  (required)
+  parent: string, Required. Resource name of the taxonomy to list the policy tags of. (required)
   pageSize: integer, The maximum number of items to return. Must be a value between 1 and 1000 inclusively. If not set, defaults to 50.
   pageToken: string, The pagination token of the next results page. If not set, returns the first page. The token is returned in the response to a previous list request.
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@
   <pre>Updates a policy tag, including its display name, description, and parent policy tag.
 
 Args:
-  name: string, Output only. Resource name of this policy tag in the URL format. The policy tag manager generates unique taxonomy IDs and policy tag IDs.  (required)
+  name: string, Output only. Resource name of this policy tag in the URL format. The policy tag manager generates unique taxonomy IDs and policy tag IDs. (required)
   body: object, The request body.
     The object takes the form of:
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html b/docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html
index 96acf9c..4f71a3f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/datastore_v1.projects.html
@@ -248,40 +248,7 @@
           ],
         },
         &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for &#x27;exclude_from_indexes&#x27;.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
-            &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
-            &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-            &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
-            &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
-              &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
-              &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
-            },
-            &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
-            &quot;keyValue&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
-              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;meaning&quot;: 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
-            &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
-            &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
-            &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
-          },
+          &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
         },
       },
       &quot;update&quot;: { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # The entity to update. The entity must already exist. Must have a complete key path.
@@ -299,40 +266,7 @@
           ],
         },
         &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for &#x27;exclude_from_indexes&#x27;.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
-            &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
-            &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-            &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
-            &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
-              &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
-              &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
-            },
-            &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
-            &quot;keyValue&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
-              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;meaning&quot;: 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
-            &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
-            &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
-            &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
-          },
+          &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
         },
       },
       &quot;upsert&quot;: { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # The entity to upsert. The entity may or may not already exist. The entity key&#x27;s final path element may be incomplete.
@@ -350,40 +284,7 @@
           ],
         },
         &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for &#x27;exclude_from_indexes&#x27;.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
-            &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
-            &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-            &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
-            &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
-              &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
-              &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
-            },
-            &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
-            &quot;keyValue&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
-              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;meaning&quot;: 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
-            &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
-            &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
-            &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
-          },
+          &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
         },
       },
     },
@@ -602,40 +503,7 @@
           ],
         },
         &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for &#x27;exclude_from_indexes&#x27;.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
-            &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
-            &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-            &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
-            &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
-              &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
-              &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
-            },
-            &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
-            &quot;keyValue&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
-              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;meaning&quot;: 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
-            &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
-            &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
-            &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
-          },
+          &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
         },
       },
       &quot;version&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the entity, a strictly positive number that monotonically increases with changes to the entity. This field is set for `FULL` entity results. For missing entities in `LookupResponse`, this is the version of the snapshot that was used to look up the entity, and it is always set except for eventually consistent reads.
@@ -659,40 +527,7 @@
           ],
         },
         &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-          &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for &#x27;exclude_from_indexes&#x27;.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
-            &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
-            &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-            &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-            &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
-            &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
-              &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
-              &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
-            },
-            &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
-            &quot;keyValue&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
-              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-              },
-              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                },
-              ],
-            },
-            &quot;meaning&quot;: 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
-            &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
-            &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
-            &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
-          },
+          &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
         },
       },
       &quot;version&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the entity, a strictly positive number that monotonically increases with changes to the entity. This field is set for `FULL` entity results. For missing entities in `LookupResponse`, this is the version of the snapshot that was used to look up the entity, and it is always set except for eventually consistent reads.
@@ -790,7 +625,24 @@
           &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-          &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+          &quot;entityValue&quot;: { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            &quot;key&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity&#x27;s key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity&#x27;s kind is its key path&#x27;s last element&#x27;s kind, or null if it has no key.
+              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+            },
+          },
           &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -829,7 +681,24 @@
           &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-          &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+          &quot;entityValue&quot;: { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            &quot;key&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity&#x27;s key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity&#x27;s kind is its key path&#x27;s last element&#x27;s kind, or null if it has no key.
+              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+            },
+          },
           &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -890,7 +759,24 @@
           &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-          &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+          &quot;entityValue&quot;: { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            &quot;key&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity&#x27;s key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity&#x27;s kind is its key path&#x27;s last element&#x27;s kind, or null if it has no key.
+              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+            },
+          },
           &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
@@ -977,40 +863,7 @@
             ],
           },
           &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-            &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types and associated metadata.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot contain another array value. A `Value` instance that sets field `array_value` must not set fields `meaning` or `exclude_from_indexes`.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array. The order of values in an array is preserved as long as all values have identical settings for &#x27;exclude_from_indexes&#x27;.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
-              &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
-              &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
-              &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-              &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
-              &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
-              &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
-                &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
-                &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
-              },
-              &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
-              &quot;keyValue&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # A key value.
-                &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
-                  &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
-                  &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
-                },
-                &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
-                  { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
-                    &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
-                    &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                    &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
-                  },
-                ],
-              },
-              &quot;meaning&quot;: 42, # The `meaning` field should only be populated for backwards compatibility.
-              &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
-              &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A UTF-8 encoded string value. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false (it is indexed) , may have at most 1500 bytes. Otherwise, may be set to at most 1,000,000 bytes.
-              &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. When stored in the Datastore, precise only to microseconds; any additional precision is rounded down.
-            },
+            &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
           },
         },
         &quot;version&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of the entity, a strictly positive number that monotonically increases with changes to the entity. This field is set for `FULL` entity results. For missing entities in `LookupResponse`, this is the version of the snapshot that was used to look up the entity, and it is always set except for eventually consistent reads.
@@ -1049,7 +902,24 @@
           &quot;blobValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A blob value. May have at most 1,000,000 bytes. When `exclude_from_indexes` is false, may have at most 1500 bytes. In JSON requests, must be base64-encoded.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
-          &quot;entityValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: Entity # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+          &quot;entityValue&quot;: { # A Datastore data object. An entity is limited to 1 megabyte when stored. That _roughly_ corresponds to a limit of 1 megabyte for the serialized form of this message. # An entity value. - May have no key. - May have a key with an incomplete key path. - May have a reserved/read-only key.
+            &quot;key&quot;: { # A unique identifier for an entity. If a key&#x27;s partition ID or any of its path kinds or names are reserved/read-only, the key is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only key is forbidden in certain documented contexts. # The entity&#x27;s key. An entity must have a key, unless otherwise documented (for example, an entity in `Value.entity_value` may have no key). An entity&#x27;s kind is its key path&#x27;s last element&#x27;s kind, or null if it has no key.
+              &quot;partitionId&quot;: { # A partition ID identifies a grouping of entities. The grouping is always by project and namespace, however the namespace ID may be empty. A partition ID contains several dimensions: project ID and namespace ID. Partition dimensions: - May be `&quot;&quot;`. - Must be valid UTF-8 bytes. - Must have values that match regex `[A-Za-z\d\.\-_]{1,100}` If the value of any dimension matches regex `__.*__`, the partition is reserved/read-only. A reserved/read-only partition ID is forbidden in certain documented contexts. Foreign partition IDs (in which the project ID does not match the context project ID ) are discouraged. Reads and writes of foreign partition IDs may fail if the project is not in an active state. # Entities are partitioned into subsets, currently identified by a project ID and namespace ID. Queries are scoped to a single partition.
+                &quot;namespaceId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If not empty, the ID of the namespace to which the entities belong.
+                &quot;projectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the project to which the entities belong.
+              },
+              &quot;path&quot;: [ # The entity path. An entity path consists of one or more elements composed of a kind and a string or numerical identifier, which identify entities. The first element identifies a _root entity_, the second element identifies a _child_ of the root entity, the third element identifies a child of the second entity, and so forth. The entities identified by all prefixes of the path are called the element&#x27;s _ancestors_. An entity path is always fully complete: *all* of the entity&#x27;s ancestors are required to be in the path along with the entity identifier itself. The only exception is that in some documented cases, the identifier in the last path element (for the entity) itself may be omitted. For example, the last path element of the key of `Mutation.insert` may have no identifier. A path can never be empty, and a path can have at most 100 elements.
+                { # A (kind, ID/name) pair used to construct a key path. If either name or ID is set, the element is complete. If neither is set, the element is incomplete.
+                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The auto-allocated ID of the entity. Never equal to zero. Values less than zero are discouraged and may not be supported in the future.
+                  &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The kind of the entity. A kind matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A kind must not contain more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+                  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the entity. A name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved/read-only. A name must not be more than 1500 bytes when UTF-8 encoded. Cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+            &quot;properties&quot;: { # The entity&#x27;s properties. The map&#x27;s keys are property names. A property name matching regex `__.*__` is reserved. A reserved property name is forbidden in certain documented contexts. The name must not contain more than 500 characters. The name cannot be `&quot;&quot;`.
+              &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+            },
+          },
           &quot;excludeFromIndexes&quot;: True or False, # If the value should be excluded from all indexes including those defined explicitly.
           &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
             &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.environments.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.environments.html
index 7fd03ab..9b34fd3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.environments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.environments.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates an Environment in the specified Agent.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates an Environment in the specified Agent. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: Environment</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes the specified Environment.</p>
@@ -115,10 +115,10 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Updates the specified Environment.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates the specified Environment. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: Environment</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#runContinuousTest">runContinuousTest(environment, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Kicks off a continuous test under the specified Environment.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Kicks off a continuous test under the specified Environment. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: RunContinuousTestMetadata - `response`: RunContinuousTestResponse</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates an Environment in the specified Agent.
+  <pre>Creates an Environment in the specified Agent. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: Environment
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The Agent to create an Environment for. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Updates the specified Environment.
+  <pre>Updates the specified Environment. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: Environment
 
 Args:
   name: string, The name of the environment. Format: `projects//locations//agents//environments/`. (required)
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="runContinuousTest">runContinuousTest(environment, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Kicks off a continuous test under the specified Environment.
+  <pre>Kicks off a continuous test under the specified Environment. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: RunContinuousTestMetadata - `response`: RunContinuousTestResponse
 
 Args:
   environment: string, Required. Format: `projects//locations//agents//environments/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.flows.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.flows.html
index 6ca9792..6ba144e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.flows.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.flows.html
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Deletes a specified flow.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#export">export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Exports the specified flow to a binary file. Note that resources (e.g. intents, entities, webhooks) that the flow references will also be exported.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Exports the specified flow to a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ExportFlowResponse Note that resources (e.g. intents, entities, webhooks) that the flow references will also be exported.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, languageCode=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the specified flow.</p>
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Gets the latest flow validation result. Flow validation is performed when ValidateFlow is called.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#import_">import_(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Imports the specified flow to the specified agent from a binary file. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Imports the specified flow to the specified agent from a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ImportFlowResponse Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, languageCode=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Returns the list of all flows in the specified agent.</p>
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Updates the specified flow. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#train">train(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Trains the specified flow. Note that only the flow in 'draft' environment is trained. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Trains the specified flow. Note that only the flow in 'draft' environment is trained. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty) Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#validate">validate(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Validates the specified flow and creates or updates validation results. Please call this API after the training is completed to get the complete validation results.</p>
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="export">export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Exports the specified flow to a binary file. Note that resources (e.g. intents, entities, webhooks) that the flow references will also be exported.
+  <pre>Exports the specified flow to a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ExportFlowResponse Note that resources (e.g. intents, entities, webhooks) that the flow references will also be exported.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the flow to export. Format: `projects//locations//agents//flows/`. (required)
@@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="import_">import_(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Imports the specified flow to the specified agent from a binary file. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
+  <pre>Imports the specified flow to the specified agent from a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ImportFlowResponse Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The agent to import the flow into. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -1862,7 +1862,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="train">train(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Trains the specified flow. Note that only the flow in &#x27;draft&#x27; environment is trained. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
+  <pre>Trains the specified flow. Note that only the flow in &#x27;draft&#x27; environment is trained. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty) Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The flow to train. Format: `projects//locations//agents//flows/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.flows.versions.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.flows.versions.html
index a68f0b1..5db29d9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.flows.versions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.flows.versions.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a Version in the specified Flow.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a Version in the specified Flow. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: CreateVersionOperationMetadata - `response`: Version</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes the specified Version.</p>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#load">load(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Loads resources in the specified version to the draft flow.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Loads resources in the specified version to the draft flow. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty)</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Updates the specified Version.</p>
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a Version in the specified Flow.
+  <pre>Creates a Version in the specified Flow. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: CreateVersionOperationMetadata - `response`: Version
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The Flow to create an Version for. Format: `projects//locations//agents//flows/`. (required)
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="load">load(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Loads resources in the specified version to the draft flow.
+  <pre>Loads resources in the specified version to the draft flow. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty)
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The Version to be loaded to draft flow. Format: `projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.html
index 3b0e1cc..2ea9da1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.html
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Deletes the specified agent.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#export">export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Exports the specified agent to a binary file.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Exports the specified agent to a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ExportAgentResponse</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the specified agent.</p>
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Updates the specified agent. Note: You should always train flows prior to sending them queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#restore">restore(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Restores the specified agent from a binary file. Replaces the current agent with a new one. Note that all existing resources in agent (e.g. intents, entity types, flows) will be removed. Note: You should always train flows prior to sending them queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Restores the specified agent from a binary file. Replaces the current agent with a new one. Note that all existing resources in agent (e.g. intents, entity types, flows) will be removed. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty) Note: You should always train flows prior to sending them queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#validate">validate(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Validates the specified agent and creates or updates validation results. The agent in draft version is validated. Please call this API after the training is completed to get the complete validation results.</p>
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="export">export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Exports the specified agent to a binary file.
+  <pre>Exports the specified agent to a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ExportAgentResponse
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the agent to export. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -491,7 +491,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="restore">restore(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Restores the specified agent from a binary file. Replaces the current agent with a new one. Note that all existing resources in agent (e.g. intents, entity types, flows) will be removed. Note: You should always train flows prior to sending them queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
+  <pre>Restores the specified agent from a binary file. Replaces the current agent with a new one. Note that all existing resources in agent (e.g. intents, entity types, flows) will be removed. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty) Note: You should always train flows prior to sending them queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the agent to restore into. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.testCases.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.testCases.html
index 3a0eaf3..26af1d7 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.testCases.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.testCases.html
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Batch deletes test cases.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#batchRun">batchRun(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Kicks off a batch run of test cases.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Kicks off a batch run of test cases. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: BatchRunTestCasesMetadata - `response`: BatchRunTestCasesResponse</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#calculateCoverage">calculateCoverage(agent, type=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Calculates the test coverage for an agent.</p>
@@ -96,13 +96,13 @@
 <p class="firstline">Creates a test case for the given agent.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#export">export(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Exports the test cases under the agent to a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. Filter can be applied to export a subset of test cases.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Exports the test cases under the agent to a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. Filter can be applied to export a subset of test cases. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: ExportTestCasesMetadata - `response`: ExportTestCasesResponse</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Gets a test case.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#import_">import_(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Imports the test cases from a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. It always creates new test cases and won't overwite any existing ones. The provided ID in the imported test case is neglected.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Imports the test cases from a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. It always creates new test cases and won't overwite any existing ones. The provided ID in the imported test case is neglected. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: ImportTestCasesMetadata - `response`: ImportTestCasesResponse</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, view=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Fetches a list of test cases for a given agent.</p>
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Updates the specified test case.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#run">run(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Kicks off a test case run.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Kicks off a test case run. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: RunTestCaseMetadata - `response`: RunTestCaseResponse</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="batchDelete">batchDelete(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="batchRun">batchRun(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Kicks off a batch run of test cases.
+  <pre>Kicks off a batch run of test cases. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: BatchRunTestCasesMetadata - `response`: BatchRunTestCasesResponse
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Agent name. Format: `projects//locations//agents/ `. (required)
@@ -3044,7 +3044,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -3747,7 +3747,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -4460,7 +4460,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -5163,7 +5163,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -5236,7 +5236,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="export">export(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Exports the test cases under the agent to a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. Filter can be applied to export a subset of test cases.
+  <pre>Exports the test cases under the agent to a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. Filter can be applied to export a subset of test cases. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: ExportTestCasesMetadata - `response`: ExportTestCasesResponse
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The agent where to export test cases from. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -5927,7 +5927,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -6630,7 +6630,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -6703,7 +6703,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="import_">import_(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Imports the test cases from a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. It always creates new test cases and won&#x27;t overwite any existing ones. The provided ID in the imported test case is neglected.
+  <pre>Imports the test cases from a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. It always creates new test cases and won&#x27;t overwite any existing ones. The provided ID in the imported test case is neglected. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: ImportTestCasesMetadata - `response`: ImportTestCasesResponse
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The agent to import test cases to. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -7403,7 +7403,7 @@
                   },
                 ],
               },
-              &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+              &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
                 &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
               },
               &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -8106,7 +8106,7 @@
                 },
               ],
             },
-            &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+            &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
             },
             &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -8837,7 +8837,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -9540,7 +9540,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -10254,7 +10254,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -10957,7 +10957,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -11030,7 +11030,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="run">run(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Kicks off a test case run.
+  <pre>Kicks off a test case run. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: RunTestCaseMetadata - `response`: RunTestCaseResponse
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Format of test case name to run: `projects//locations/ /agents//testCases/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.testCases.results.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.testCases.results.html
index 827ad69..16d1e75 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.testCases.results.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3.projects.locations.agents.testCases.results.html
@@ -738,7 +738,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -1459,7 +1459,7 @@
                 },
               ],
             },
-            &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+            &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
             },
             &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.environments.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.environments.html
index a0d393c..3b30c6c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.environments.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.environments.html
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates an Environment in the specified Agent.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates an Environment in the specified Agent. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: Environment</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes the specified Environment.</p>
@@ -115,10 +115,10 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Updates the specified Environment.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates the specified Environment. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: Environment</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#runContinuousTest">runContinuousTest(environment, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Kicks off a continuous test under the specified Environment.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Kicks off a continuous test under the specified Environment. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: RunContinuousTestMetadata - `response`: RunContinuousTestResponse</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates an Environment in the specified Agent.
+  <pre>Creates an Environment in the specified Agent. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: Environment
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The Agent to create an Environment for. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Updates the specified Environment.
+  <pre>Updates the specified Environment. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: Environment
 
 Args:
   name: string, The name of the environment. Format: `projects//locations//agents//environments/`. (required)
@@ -369,7 +369,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="runContinuousTest">runContinuousTest(environment, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Kicks off a continuous test under the specified Environment.
+  <pre>Kicks off a continuous test under the specified Environment. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: RunContinuousTestMetadata - `response`: RunContinuousTestResponse
 
 Args:
   environment: string, Required. Format: `projects//locations//agents//environments/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.flows.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.flows.html
index e2eb553..6978aa9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.flows.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.flows.html
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Deletes a specified flow.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#export">export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Exports the specified flow to a binary file. Note that resources (e.g. intents, entities, webhooks) that the flow references will also be exported.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Exports the specified flow to a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ExportFlowResponse Note that resources (e.g. intents, entities, webhooks) that the flow references will also be exported.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, languageCode=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the specified flow.</p>
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Gets the latest flow validation result. Flow validation is performed when ValidateFlow is called.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#import_">import_(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Imports the specified flow to the specified agent from a binary file. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Imports the specified flow to the specified agent from a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ImportFlowResponse Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, languageCode=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Returns the list of all flows in the specified agent.</p>
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Updates the specified flow. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#train">train(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Trains the specified flow. Note that only the flow in 'draft' environment is trained. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Trains the specified flow. Note that only the flow in 'draft' environment is trained. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty) Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#validate">validate(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Validates the specified flow and creates or updates validation results. Please call this API after the training is completed to get the complete validation results.</p>
@@ -669,7 +669,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="export">export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Exports the specified flow to a binary file. Note that resources (e.g. intents, entities, webhooks) that the flow references will also be exported.
+  <pre>Exports the specified flow to a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ExportFlowResponse Note that resources (e.g. intents, entities, webhooks) that the flow references will also be exported.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the flow to export. Format: `projects//locations//agents//flows/`. (required)
@@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="import_">import_(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Imports the specified flow to the specified agent from a binary file. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
+  <pre>Imports the specified flow to the specified agent from a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ImportFlowResponse Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The agent to import the flow into. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -1862,7 +1862,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="train">train(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Trains the specified flow. Note that only the flow in &#x27;draft&#x27; environment is trained. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
+  <pre>Trains the specified flow. Note that only the flow in &#x27;draft&#x27; environment is trained. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty) Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The flow to train. Format: `projects//locations//agents//flows/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.flows.versions.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.flows.versions.html
index 25176de..c19d1a3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.flows.versions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.flows.versions.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a Version in the specified Flow.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a Version in the specified Flow. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: CreateVersionOperationMetadata - `response`: Version</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes the specified Version.</p>
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#load">load(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Loads resources in the specified version to the draft flow.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Loads resources in the specified version to the draft flow. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty)</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Updates the specified Version.</p>
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a Version in the specified Flow.
+  <pre>Creates a Version in the specified Flow. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: CreateVersionOperationMetadata - `response`: Version
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The Flow to create an Version for. Format: `projects//locations//agents//flows/`. (required)
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="load">load(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Loads resources in the specified version to the draft flow.
+  <pre>Loads resources in the specified version to the draft flow. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty)
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The Version to be loaded to draft flow. Format: `projects//locations//agents//flows//versions/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.html
index 7c9aff5..566bb8b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.html
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Deletes the specified agent.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#export">export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Exports the specified agent to a binary file.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Exports the specified agent to a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ExportAgentResponse</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Retrieves the specified agent.</p>
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Updates the specified agent. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#restore">restore(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Restores the specified agent from a binary file. Replaces the current agent with a new one. Note that all existing resources in agent (e.g. intents, entity types, flows) will be removed. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Restores the specified agent from a binary file. Replaces the current agent with a new one. Note that all existing resources in agent (e.g. intents, entity types, flows) will be removed. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty) Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#validate">validate(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Validates the specified agent and creates or updates validation results. The agent in draft version is validated. Please call this API after the training is completed to get the complete validation results.</p>
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="export">export(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Exports the specified agent to a binary file.
+  <pre>Exports the specified agent to a binary file. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: ExportAgentResponse
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the agent to export. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -491,7 +491,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="restore">restore(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Restores the specified agent from a binary file. Replaces the current agent with a new one. Note that all existing resources in agent (e.g. intents, entity types, flows) will be removed. Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
+  <pre>Restores the specified agent from a binary file. Replaces the current agent with a new one. Note that all existing resources in agent (e.g. intents, entity types, flows) will be removed. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: An empty [Struct message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#struct) - `response`: An [Empty message](https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/docs/reference/google.protobuf#empty) Note: You should always train a flow prior to sending it queries. See the [training documentation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/concept/training).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The name of the agent to restore into. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.testCases.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.testCases.html
index 4612ffa..02a1ab3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.testCases.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.testCases.html
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Batch deletes test cases.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#batchRun">batchRun(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Kicks off a batch run of test cases.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Kicks off a batch run of test cases. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: BatchRunTestCasesMetadata - `response`: BatchRunTestCasesResponse</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#calculateCoverage">calculateCoverage(agent, type=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Calculates the test coverage for an agent.</p>
@@ -96,13 +96,13 @@
 <p class="firstline">Creates a test case for the given agent.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#export">export(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Exports the test cases under the agent to a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. Filter can be applied to export a subset of test cases.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Exports the test cases under the agent to a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. Filter can be applied to export a subset of test cases. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: ExportTestCasesMetadata - `response`: ExportTestCasesResponse</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Gets a test case.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#import_">import_(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Imports the test cases from a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. It always creates new test cases and won't overwite any existing ones. The provided ID in the imported test case is neglected.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Imports the test cases from a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. It always creates new test cases and won't overwite any existing ones. The provided ID in the imported test case is neglected. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: ImportTestCasesMetadata - `response`: ImportTestCasesResponse</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, view=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Fetches a list of test cases for a given agent.</p>
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Updates the specified test case.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#run">run(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Kicks off a test case run.</p>
+<p class="firstline">Kicks off a test case run. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: RunTestCaseMetadata - `response`: RunTestCaseResponse</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="batchDelete">batchDelete(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="batchRun">batchRun(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Kicks off a batch run of test cases.
+  <pre>Kicks off a batch run of test cases. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: BatchRunTestCasesMetadata - `response`: BatchRunTestCasesResponse
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. Agent name. Format: `projects//locations//agents/ `. (required)
@@ -3044,7 +3044,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -3747,7 +3747,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -4460,7 +4460,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -5163,7 +5163,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -5236,7 +5236,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="export">export(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Exports the test cases under the agent to a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. Filter can be applied to export a subset of test cases.
+  <pre>Exports the test cases under the agent to a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. Filter can be applied to export a subset of test cases. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: ExportTestCasesMetadata - `response`: ExportTestCasesResponse
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The agent where to export test cases from. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -5927,7 +5927,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -6630,7 +6630,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -6703,7 +6703,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="import_">import_(parent, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Imports the test cases from a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. It always creates new test cases and won&#x27;t overwite any existing ones. The provided ID in the imported test case is neglected.
+  <pre>Imports the test cases from a Cloud Storage bucket or a local file. It always creates new test cases and won&#x27;t overwite any existing ones. The provided ID in the imported test case is neglected. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: ImportTestCasesMetadata - `response`: ImportTestCasesResponse
 
 Args:
   parent: string, Required. The agent to import test cases to. Format: `projects//locations//agents/`. (required)
@@ -7403,7 +7403,7 @@
                   },
                 ],
               },
-              &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+              &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
                 &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
               },
               &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -8106,7 +8106,7 @@
                 },
               ],
             },
-            &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+            &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
             },
             &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -8837,7 +8837,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -9540,7 +9540,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -10254,7 +10254,7 @@
               },
             ],
           },
-          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+          &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
             &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
           },
           &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -10957,7 +10957,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -11030,7 +11030,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="run">run(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Kicks off a test case run.
+  <pre>Kicks off a test case run. This method is a [long-running operation](https://cloud.google.com/dialogflow/cx/docs/how/long-running-operation). The returned `Operation` type has the following method-specific fields: - `metadata`: RunTestCaseMetadata - `response`: RunTestCaseResponse
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. Format of test case name to run: `projects//locations/ /agents//testCases/`. (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.testCases.results.html b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.testCases.results.html
index f3900d8..0d93657 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.testCases.results.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/dialogflow_v3beta1.projects.locations.agents.testCases.results.html
@@ -738,7 +738,7 @@
             },
           ],
         },
-        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+        &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
         },
         &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
@@ -1459,7 +1459,7 @@
                 },
               ],
             },
-            &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn.
+            &quot;diagnosticInfo&quot;: { # Required. Input only. The diagnostic info output for the turn. Required to calculate the testing coverage.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object.
             },
             &quot;differences&quot;: [ # Output only. If this is part of a result conversation turn, the list of differences between the original run and the replay for this output, if any.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v1.media.html b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v1.media.html
index 2f13d82..e691c4b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v1.media.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/displayvideo_v1.media.html
@@ -83,9 +83,6 @@
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#download_media">download_media(resourceName, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Downloads media. Download is supported on the URI `/download/{resource_name=**}?alt=media.` **Note**: Download requests will not be successful without including `alt=media` query string.</p>
-<p class="toc_element">
-  <code><a href="#upload">upload(resourceName, body=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Uploads media. Upload is supported on the URI `/upload/media/{resource_name=**}?upload_type=media.` **Note**: Upload requests will not be successful without including `upload_type=media` query string.</p>
 <h3>Method Details</h3>
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
@@ -128,32 +125,4 @@
     </pre>
 </div>
 
-<div class="method">
-    <code class="details" id="upload">upload(resourceName, body=None, media_body=None, media_mime_type=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Uploads media. Upload is supported on the URI `/upload/media/{resource_name=**}?upload_type=media.` **Note**: Upload requests will not be successful without including `upload_type=media` query string.
-
-Args:
-  resourceName: string, Name of the media that is being downloaded. See ReadRequest.resource_name. (required)
-  body: object, The request body.
-    The object takes the form of:
-
-{ # Media resource.
-  &quot;resourceName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the media resource.
-}
-
-  media_body: string, The filename of the media request body, or an instance of a MediaUpload object.
-  media_mime_type: string, The MIME type of the media request body, or an instance of a MediaUpload object.
-  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
-    Allowed values
-      1 - v1 error format
-      2 - v2 error format
-
-Returns:
-  An object of the form:
-
-    { # Media resource.
-  &quot;resourceName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Name of the media resource.
-}</pre>
-</div>
-
 </body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.html
index 9a40e66..81701f9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.html
@@ -357,6 +357,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
@@ -1092,6 +1094,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.humanReviewConfig.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.humanReviewConfig.html
index 01c6213..dc23bee 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.humanReviewConfig.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.humanReviewConfig.html
@@ -285,6 +285,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.processorVersions.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.processorVersions.html
index 618ea1f..d3dfbc1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.processorVersions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1.projects.locations.processors.processorVersions.html
@@ -347,6 +347,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
@@ -1082,6 +1084,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta2.projects.documents.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta2.projects.documents.html
index 26074e1..c9ff699 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta2.projects.documents.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta2.projects.documents.html
@@ -479,6 +479,8 @@
       },
       &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
         { # A form field detected on the page.
+          &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+          &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
           &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
             &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
               &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta2.projects.locations.documents.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta2.projects.locations.documents.html
index 0708d39..54d7424 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta2.projects.locations.documents.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta2.projects.locations.documents.html
@@ -479,6 +479,8 @@
       },
       &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
         { # A form field detected on the page.
+          &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+          &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
           &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
             &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
               &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.html
index 573f8c9..55199a2 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.html
@@ -588,6 +588,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
@@ -1307,6 +1309,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
@@ -2042,6 +2046,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.humanReviewConfig.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.humanReviewConfig.html
index b1faa15..1b2f02b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.humanReviewConfig.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.humanReviewConfig.html
@@ -284,6 +284,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
@@ -1004,6 +1006,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.processorVersions.html b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.processorVersions.html
index 13db15b..fbb28c6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.processorVersions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/documentai_v1beta3.projects.locations.processors.processorVersions.html
@@ -356,6 +356,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
@@ -1075,6 +1077,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
@@ -1810,6 +1814,8 @@
         },
         &quot;formFields&quot;: [ # A list of visually detected form fields on the page.
           { # A form field detected on the page.
+            &quot;correctedKeyText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export key text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_name.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
+            &quot;correctedValueText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Created for Labeling UI to export value text. If corrections were made to the text identified by the `field_value.text_anchor`, this field will contain the correction.
             &quot;fieldName&quot;: { # Visual element describing a layout unit on a page. # Layout for the FormField name. e.g. `Address`, `Email`, `Grand total`, `Phone number`, etc.
               &quot;boundingPoly&quot;: { # A bounding polygon for the detected image annotation. # The bounding polygon for the Layout.
                 &quot;normalizedVertices&quot;: [ # The bounding polygon normalized vertices.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/file_v1beta1.projects.locations.instances.html b/docs/dyn/file_v1beta1.projects.locations.instances.html
index fc42bdd..54b7173 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/file_v1beta1.projects.locations.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/file_v1beta1.projects.locations.instances.html
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@
   <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, instanceId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Creates an instance. When creating from a backup, the capacity of the new instance needs to be equal to or larger than the capacity of the backup (and also equal to or larger than the minimum capacity of the tier).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
-  <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+  <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, force=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes an instance.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
@@ -198,11 +198,12 @@
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
-    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, force=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
   <pre>Deletes an instance.
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The instance resource name, in the format `projects/{project_id}/locations/{location}/instances/{instance_id}` (required)
+  force: boolean, If set to true, any snapshots of the instance will also be deleted. (Otherwise, the request will only work if the instance has no snapshots.)
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
     Allowed values
       1 - v1 error format
diff --git a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html
index 352fb52..712832b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/firestore_v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/firestore_v1beta1.projects.databases.documents.html
@@ -175,11 +175,7 @@
     &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
     &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-        &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-          &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-            # Object with schema name: Value
-          ],
-        },
+        &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
         &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
         &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
         &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -234,16 +230,31 @@
           { # A transformation of a field of the document.
             &quot;appendMissingElements&quot;: { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
               &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
+                { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                  &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                  &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                  &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                  &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                    &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                    &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                  },
+                  &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                  &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                    &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                      &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                  &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                  &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+                },
               ],
             },
             &quot;fieldPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference.
             &quot;increment&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field&#x27;s current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -263,11 +274,7 @@
               &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
             },
             &quot;maximum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -287,11 +294,7 @@
               &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
             },
             &quot;minimum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -312,7 +315,26 @@
             },
             &quot;removeAllFromArray&quot;: { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
               &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
+                { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                  &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                  &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                  &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                  &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                    &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                    &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                  },
+                  &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                  &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                    &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                      &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                  &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                  &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+                },
               ],
             },
             &quot;setToServerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Sets the field to the given server value.
@@ -323,11 +345,7 @@
         &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
         &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -359,16 +377,31 @@
         { # A transformation of a field of the document.
           &quot;appendMissingElements&quot;: { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
             &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
+              { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                  &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                  &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                },
+                &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                  &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                    &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+              },
             ],
           },
           &quot;fieldPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference.
           &quot;increment&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field&#x27;s current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -388,11 +421,7 @@
             &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
           },
           &quot;maximum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -412,11 +441,7 @@
             &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
           },
           &quot;minimum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -437,7 +462,26 @@
           },
           &quot;removeAllFromArray&quot;: { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
             &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
+              { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                  &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                  &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                },
+                &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                  &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                    &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+              },
             ],
           },
           &quot;setToServerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Sets the field to the given server value.
@@ -471,11 +515,7 @@
     { # The result of applying a write.
       &quot;transformResults&quot;: [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order.
         { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -563,16 +603,31 @@
           { # A transformation of a field of the document.
             &quot;appendMissingElements&quot;: { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
               &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
+                { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                  &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                  &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                  &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                  &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                    &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                    &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                  },
+                  &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                  &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                    &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                      &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                  &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                  &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+                },
               ],
             },
             &quot;fieldPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference.
             &quot;increment&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field&#x27;s current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -592,11 +647,7 @@
               &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
             },
             &quot;maximum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -616,11 +667,7 @@
               &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
             },
             &quot;minimum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -641,7 +688,26 @@
             },
             &quot;removeAllFromArray&quot;: { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
               &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
+                { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                  &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                  &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                  &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                  &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                    &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                    &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                  },
+                  &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                  &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                    &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                      &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                  &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                  &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+                },
               ],
             },
             &quot;setToServerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Sets the field to the given server value.
@@ -652,11 +718,7 @@
         &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
         &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -688,16 +750,31 @@
         { # A transformation of a field of the document.
           &quot;appendMissingElements&quot;: { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
             &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
+              { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                  &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                  &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                },
+                &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                  &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                    &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+              },
             ],
           },
           &quot;fieldPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference.
           &quot;increment&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field&#x27;s current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -717,11 +794,7 @@
             &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
           },
           &quot;maximum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -741,11 +814,7 @@
             &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
           },
           &quot;minimum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -766,7 +835,26 @@
           },
           &quot;removeAllFromArray&quot;: { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
             &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
+              { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                  &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                  &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                },
+                &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                  &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                    &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+              },
             ],
           },
           &quot;setToServerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Sets the field to the given server value.
@@ -790,11 +878,7 @@
     { # The result of applying a write.
       &quot;transformResults&quot;: [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order.
         { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -834,11 +918,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
   &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-        &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-          # Object with schema name: Value
-        ],
-      },
+      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
       &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
       &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
       &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -876,11 +956,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
   &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-        &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-          # Object with schema name: Value
-        ],
-      },
+      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
       &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
       &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
       &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -946,11 +1022,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
   &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-        &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-          # Object with schema name: Value
-        ],
-      },
+      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
       &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
       &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
       &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1003,11 +1075,7 @@
       &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
       &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1117,11 +1185,7 @@
           &quot;before&quot;: True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query.
           &quot;values&quot;: [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause.
             { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1169,11 +1233,7 @@
           &quot;before&quot;: True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query.
           &quot;values&quot;: [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause.
             { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1207,11 +1267,7 @@
             },
             &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The operator to filter by.
             &quot;value&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1264,11 +1320,7 @@
       &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
       &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
         &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1354,11 +1406,7 @@
       &quot;before&quot;: True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query.
       &quot;values&quot;: [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause.
         { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1406,11 +1454,7 @@
       &quot;before&quot;: True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query.
       &quot;values&quot;: [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause.
         { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1444,11 +1488,7 @@
         },
         &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The operator to filter by.
         &quot;value&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1493,11 +1533,7 @@
       &quot;before&quot;: True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query.
       &quot;values&quot;: [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause.
         { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1549,11 +1585,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
   &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-        &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-          # Object with schema name: Value
-        ],
-      },
+      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
       &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
       &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
       &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1593,11 +1625,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
   &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
     &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-        &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-          # Object with schema name: Value
-        ],
-      },
+      &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
       &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
       &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
       &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1671,11 +1699,7 @@
       &quot;before&quot;: True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query.
       &quot;values&quot;: [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause.
         { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1723,11 +1747,7 @@
       &quot;before&quot;: True or False, # If the position is just before or just after the given values, relative to the sort order defined by the query.
       &quot;values&quot;: [ # The values that represent a position, in the order they appear in the order by clause of a query. Can contain fewer values than specified in the order by clause.
         { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1761,11 +1781,7 @@
         },
         &quot;op&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The operator to filter by.
         &quot;value&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # The value to compare to.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1809,11 +1825,7 @@
     &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
     &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
       &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-        &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-          &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-            # Object with schema name: Value
-          ],
-        },
+        &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
         &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
         &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
         &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1870,16 +1882,31 @@
           { # A transformation of a field of the document.
             &quot;appendMissingElements&quot;: { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
               &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
+                { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                  &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                  &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                  &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                  &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                    &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                    &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                  },
+                  &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                  &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                    &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                      &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                  &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                  &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+                },
               ],
             },
             &quot;fieldPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference.
             &quot;increment&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field&#x27;s current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1899,11 +1926,7 @@
               &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
             },
             &quot;maximum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1923,11 +1946,7 @@
               &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
             },
             &quot;minimum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-                &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                  # Object with schema name: Value
-                ],
-              },
+              &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
               &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
               &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
               &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1948,7 +1967,26 @@
             },
             &quot;removeAllFromArray&quot;: { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
               &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
+                { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                  &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                  &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                  &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                  &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                    &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                    &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                  },
+                  &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                  &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                    &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                      &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                  &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                  &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                  &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+                },
               ],
             },
             &quot;setToServerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Sets the field to the given server value.
@@ -1959,11 +1997,7 @@
         &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time at which the document was created. This value increases monotonically when a document is deleted then recreated. It can also be compared to values from other documents and the `read_time` of a query.
         &quot;fields&quot;: { # The document&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. A simple field name contains only characters `a` to `z`, `A` to `Z`, `0` to `9`, or `_`, and must not start with `0` to `9`. For example, `foo_bar_17`. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty. Field paths may be used in other contexts to refer to structured fields defined here. For `map_value`, the field path is represented by the simple or quoted field names of the containing fields, delimited by `.`. For example, the structured field `&quot;foo&quot; : { map_value: { &quot;x&amp;y&quot; : { string_value: &quot;hello&quot; }}}` would be represented by the field path `foo.x&amp;y`. Within a field path, a quoted field name starts and ends with `` ` `` and may contain any character. Some characters, including `` ` ``, must be escaped using a `\`. For example, `` `x&amp;y` `` represents `x&amp;y` and `` `bak\`tik` `` represents `` bak`tik ``.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -1995,16 +2029,31 @@
         { # A transformation of a field of the document.
           &quot;appendMissingElements&quot;: { # An array value. # Append the given elements in order if they are not already present in the current field value. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is first set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when checking if a value is missing. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. If the input contains multiple equivalent values, only the first will be considered. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
             &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
+              { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                  &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                  &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                },
+                &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                  &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                    &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+              },
             ],
           },
           &quot;fieldPath&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The path of the field. See Document.fields for the field path syntax reference.
           &quot;increment&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Adds the given value to the field&#x27;s current value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If either of the given value or the current field value are doubles, both values will be interpreted as doubles. Double arithmetic and representation of double values follow IEEE 754 semantics. If there is positive/negative integer overflow, the field is resolved to the largest magnitude positive/negative integer.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -2024,11 +2073,7 @@
             &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
           },
           &quot;maximum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the maximum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the given value. If a maximum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the larger operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The maximum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The maximum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -2048,11 +2093,7 @@
             &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
           },
           &quot;minimum&quot;: { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types. # Sets the field to the minimum of its current value and the given value. This must be an integer or a double value. If the field is not an integer or double, or if the field does not yet exist, the transformation will set the field to the input value. If a minimum operation is applied where the field and the input value are of mixed types (that is - one is an integer and one is a double) the field takes on the type of the smaller operand. If the operands are equivalent (e.g. 3 and 3.0), the field does not change. 0, 0.0, and -0.0 are all zero. The minimum of a zero stored value and zero input value is always the stored value. The minimum of any numeric value x and NaN is NaN.
-            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-              &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-                # Object with schema name: Value
-              ],
-            },
+            &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
             &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
             &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
             &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
@@ -2073,7 +2114,26 @@
           },
           &quot;removeAllFromArray&quot;: { # An array value. # Remove all of the given elements from the array in the field. If the field is not an array, or if the field does not yet exist, it is set to the empty array. Equivalent numbers of the different types (e.g. 3L and 3.0) are considered equal when deciding whether an element should be removed. NaN is equal to NaN, and Null is equal to Null. This will remove all equivalent values if there are duplicates. The corresponding transform_result will be the null value.
             &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
+              { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
+                &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
+                &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
+                &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
+                &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
+                &quot;geoPointValue&quot;: { # An object that represents a latitude/longitude pair. This is expressed as a pair of doubles to represent degrees latitude and degrees longitude. Unless specified otherwise, this object must conform to the WGS84 standard. Values must be within normalized ranges. # A geo point value representing a point on the surface of Earth.
+                  &quot;latitude&quot;: 3.14, # The latitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-90.0, +90.0].
+                  &quot;longitude&quot;: 3.14, # The longitude in degrees. It must be in the range [-180.0, +180.0].
+                },
+                &quot;integerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An integer value.
+                &quot;mapValue&quot;: { # A map value. # A map value.
+                  &quot;fields&quot;: { # The map&#x27;s fields. The map keys represent field names. Field names matching the regular expression `__.*__` are reserved. Reserved field names are forbidden except in certain documented contexts. The map keys, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1,500 bytes and cannot be empty.
+                    &quot;a_key&quot;: # Object with schema name: Value
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;nullValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A null value.
+                &quot;referenceValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A reference to a document. For example: `projects/{project_id}/databases/{database_id}/documents/{document_path}`.
+                &quot;stringValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string value. The string, represented as UTF-8, must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes of the UTF-8 representation are considered by queries.
+                &quot;timestampValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A timestamp value. Precise only to microseconds. When stored, any additional precision is rounded down.
+              },
             ],
           },
           &quot;setToServerValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Sets the field to the given server value.
@@ -2099,11 +2159,7 @@
     { # The result of applying a write.
       &quot;transformResults&quot;: [ # The results of applying each DocumentTransform.FieldTransform, in the same order.
         { # A message that can hold any of the supported value types.
-          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: { # An array value. # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
-            &quot;values&quot;: [ # Values in the array.
-              # Object with schema name: Value
-            ],
-          },
+          &quot;arrayValue&quot;: # Object with schema name: ArrayValue # An array value. Cannot directly contain another array value, though can contain an map which contains another array.
           &quot;booleanValue&quot;: True or False, # A boolean value.
           &quot;bytesValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A bytes value. Must not exceed 1 MiB - 89 bytes. Only the first 1,500 bytes are considered by queries.
           &quot;doubleValue&quot;: 3.14, # A double value.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha2.projects.locations.memberships.html b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha2.projects.locations.memberships.html
index d781fb4..4b87093 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha2.projects.locations.memberships.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/gkehub_v1alpha2.projects.locations.memberships.html
@@ -164,6 +164,15 @@
         &quot;v1beta1Crd&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions &lt;1.16.
       },
     },
+    &quot;multiCloudCluster&quot;: { # MultiCloudCluster contains information specific to GKE Multi-Cloud clusters. # Optional. Specific information for a GKE Multi-Cloud cluster.
+      &quot;clusterMissing&quot;: True or False, # Output only. If cluster_missing is set then it denotes that API(gkemulticloud.googleapis.com) resource for this GKE Multi-Cloud cluster no longer exists.
+      &quot;resourceLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Self-link of the GCP resource for the GKE Multi-Cloud cluster. For example: //gkemulticloud.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/awsClusters/my-cluster //gkemulticloud.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/azureClusters/my-cluster
+    },
+    &quot;onPremCluster&quot;: { # OnPremCluster contains information specific to GKE On-Prem clusters. # Optional. Specific information for a GKE On-Prem cluster.
+      &quot;adminCluster&quot;: True or False, # Immutable. Whether the cluster is an admin cluster.
+      &quot;clusterMissing&quot;: True or False, # Output only. If cluster_missing is set then it denotes that API(gkeonprem.googleapis.com) resource for this GKE On-Prem cluster no longer exists.
+      &quot;resourceLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Self-link of the GCP resource for the GKE On-Prem cluster. For example: //gkeonprem.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/vmwareClusters/my-cluster //gkeonprem.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/bareMetalClusters/my-cluster
+    },
   },
   &quot;externalId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An externally-generated and managed ID for this Membership. This ID may be modified after creation, but this is not recommended. For GKE clusters, external_id is managed by the Hub API and updates will be ignored. The ID must match the regex: `a-zA-Z0-9*` If this Membership represents a Kubernetes cluster, this value should be set to the UID of the `kube-system` namespace object.
   &quot;infrastructureType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The infrastructure type this Membership is running on.
@@ -333,6 +342,15 @@
         &quot;v1beta1Crd&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions &lt;1.16.
       },
     },
+    &quot;multiCloudCluster&quot;: { # MultiCloudCluster contains information specific to GKE Multi-Cloud clusters. # Optional. Specific information for a GKE Multi-Cloud cluster.
+      &quot;clusterMissing&quot;: True or False, # Output only. If cluster_missing is set then it denotes that API(gkemulticloud.googleapis.com) resource for this GKE Multi-Cloud cluster no longer exists.
+      &quot;resourceLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Self-link of the GCP resource for the GKE Multi-Cloud cluster. For example: //gkemulticloud.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/awsClusters/my-cluster //gkemulticloud.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/azureClusters/my-cluster
+    },
+    &quot;onPremCluster&quot;: { # OnPremCluster contains information specific to GKE On-Prem clusters. # Optional. Specific information for a GKE On-Prem cluster.
+      &quot;adminCluster&quot;: True or False, # Immutable. Whether the cluster is an admin cluster.
+      &quot;clusterMissing&quot;: True or False, # Output only. If cluster_missing is set then it denotes that API(gkeonprem.googleapis.com) resource for this GKE On-Prem cluster no longer exists.
+      &quot;resourceLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Self-link of the GCP resource for the GKE On-Prem cluster. For example: //gkeonprem.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/vmwareClusters/my-cluster //gkeonprem.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/bareMetalClusters/my-cluster
+    },
   },
   &quot;externalId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An externally-generated and managed ID for this Membership. This ID may be modified after creation, but this is not recommended. For GKE clusters, external_id is managed by the Hub API and updates will be ignored. The ID must match the regex: `a-zA-Z0-9*` If this Membership represents a Kubernetes cluster, this value should be set to the UID of the `kube-system` namespace object.
   &quot;infrastructureType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The infrastructure type this Membership is running on.
@@ -460,6 +478,15 @@
             &quot;v1beta1Crd&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions &lt;1.16.
           },
         },
+        &quot;multiCloudCluster&quot;: { # MultiCloudCluster contains information specific to GKE Multi-Cloud clusters. # Optional. Specific information for a GKE Multi-Cloud cluster.
+          &quot;clusterMissing&quot;: True or False, # Output only. If cluster_missing is set then it denotes that API(gkemulticloud.googleapis.com) resource for this GKE Multi-Cloud cluster no longer exists.
+          &quot;resourceLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Self-link of the GCP resource for the GKE Multi-Cloud cluster. For example: //gkemulticloud.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/awsClusters/my-cluster //gkemulticloud.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/azureClusters/my-cluster
+        },
+        &quot;onPremCluster&quot;: { # OnPremCluster contains information specific to GKE On-Prem clusters. # Optional. Specific information for a GKE On-Prem cluster.
+          &quot;adminCluster&quot;: True or False, # Immutable. Whether the cluster is an admin cluster.
+          &quot;clusterMissing&quot;: True or False, # Output only. If cluster_missing is set then it denotes that API(gkeonprem.googleapis.com) resource for this GKE On-Prem cluster no longer exists.
+          &quot;resourceLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Self-link of the GCP resource for the GKE On-Prem cluster. For example: //gkeonprem.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/vmwareClusters/my-cluster //gkeonprem.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/bareMetalClusters/my-cluster
+        },
       },
       &quot;externalId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An externally-generated and managed ID for this Membership. This ID may be modified after creation, but this is not recommended. For GKE clusters, external_id is managed by the Hub API and updates will be ignored. The ID must match the regex: `a-zA-Z0-9*` If this Membership represents a Kubernetes cluster, this value should be set to the UID of the `kube-system` namespace object.
       &quot;infrastructureType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The infrastructure type this Membership is running on.
@@ -546,6 +573,15 @@
         &quot;v1beta1Crd&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Use `apiextensions/v1beta1` instead of `apiextensions/v1` for CustomResourceDefinition resources. This option should be set for clusters with Kubernetes apiserver versions &lt;1.16.
       },
     },
+    &quot;multiCloudCluster&quot;: { # MultiCloudCluster contains information specific to GKE Multi-Cloud clusters. # Optional. Specific information for a GKE Multi-Cloud cluster.
+      &quot;clusterMissing&quot;: True or False, # Output only. If cluster_missing is set then it denotes that API(gkemulticloud.googleapis.com) resource for this GKE Multi-Cloud cluster no longer exists.
+      &quot;resourceLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Self-link of the GCP resource for the GKE Multi-Cloud cluster. For example: //gkemulticloud.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/awsClusters/my-cluster //gkemulticloud.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/azureClusters/my-cluster
+    },
+    &quot;onPremCluster&quot;: { # OnPremCluster contains information specific to GKE On-Prem clusters. # Optional. Specific information for a GKE On-Prem cluster.
+      &quot;adminCluster&quot;: True or False, # Immutable. Whether the cluster is an admin cluster.
+      &quot;clusterMissing&quot;: True or False, # Output only. If cluster_missing is set then it denotes that API(gkeonprem.googleapis.com) resource for this GKE On-Prem cluster no longer exists.
+      &quot;resourceLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Immutable. Self-link of the GCP resource for the GKE On-Prem cluster. For example: //gkeonprem.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/vmwareClusters/my-cluster //gkeonprem.googleapis.com/projects/my-project/locations/us-west1-a/bareMetalClusters/my-cluster
+    },
   },
   &quot;externalId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. An externally-generated and managed ID for this Membership. This ID may be modified after creation, but this is not recommended. For GKE clusters, external_id is managed by the Hub API and updates will be ignored. The ID must match the regex: `a-zA-Z0-9*` If this Membership represents a Kubernetes cluster, this value should be set to the UID of the `kube-system` namespace object.
   &quot;infrastructureType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. The infrastructure type this Membership is running on.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/iam_v1.projects.serviceAccounts.keys.html b/docs/dyn/iam_v1.projects.serviceAccounts.keys.html
index 25a3fed..dc5ba6a 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/iam_v1.projects.serviceAccounts.keys.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/iam_v1.projects.serviceAccounts.keys.html
@@ -84,6 +84,12 @@
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes a ServiceAccountKey. Deleting a service account key does not revoke short-lived credentials that have been issued based on the service account key.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#disable">disable(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Disable a ServiceAccountKey. A disabled service account key can be enabled through EnableServiceAccountKey. The API is currently in preview phase.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#enable">enable(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Enable a ServiceAccountKey. The API is currently in preview phase.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#get">get(name, publicKeyType=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Gets a ServiceAccountKey.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
@@ -121,6 +127,7 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # Represents a service account key. A service account has two sets of key-pairs: user-managed, and system-managed. User-managed key-pairs can be created and deleted by users. Users are responsible for rotating these keys periodically to ensure security of their service accounts. Users retain the private key of these key-pairs, and Google retains ONLY the public key. System-managed keys are automatically rotated by Google, and are used for signing for a maximum of two weeks. The rotation process is probabilistic, and usage of the new key will gradually ramp up and down over the key&#x27;s lifetime. If you cache the public key set for a service account, we recommend that you update the cache every 15 minutes. User-managed keys can be added and removed at any time, so it is important to update the cache frequently. For Google-managed keys, Google will publish a key at least 6 hours before it is first used for signing and will keep publishing it for at least 6 hours after it was last used for signing. Public keys for all service accounts are also published at the OAuth2 Service Account API.
+  &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # The key status.
   &quot;keyAlgorithm&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the algorithm (and possibly key size) for the key.
   &quot;keyOrigin&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The key origin.
   &quot;keyType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The key type.
@@ -152,6 +159,54 @@
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="disable">disable(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Disable a ServiceAccountKey. A disabled service account key can be enabled through EnableServiceAccountKey. The API is currently in preview phase.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the service account key in the following format: `projects/{PROJECT_ID}/serviceAccounts/{ACCOUNT}/keys/{key}`. Using `-` as a wildcard for the `PROJECT_ID` will infer the project from the account. The `ACCOUNT` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The service account key disable request.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="enable">enable(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Enable a ServiceAccountKey. The API is currently in preview phase.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. The resource name of the service account key in the following format: `projects/{PROJECT_ID}/serviceAccounts/{ACCOUNT}/keys/{key}`. Using `-` as a wildcard for the `PROJECT_ID` will infer the project from the account. The `ACCOUNT` value can be the `email` address or the `unique_id` of the service account. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # The service account key enable request.
+}
+
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # A generic empty message that you can re-use to avoid defining duplicated empty messages in your APIs. A typical example is to use it as the request or the response type of an API method. For instance: service Foo { rpc Bar(google.protobuf.Empty) returns (google.protobuf.Empty); } The JSON representation for `Empty` is empty JSON object `{}`.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="get">get(name, publicKeyType=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
   <pre>Gets a ServiceAccountKey.
 
@@ -171,6 +226,7 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # Represents a service account key. A service account has two sets of key-pairs: user-managed, and system-managed. User-managed key-pairs can be created and deleted by users. Users are responsible for rotating these keys periodically to ensure security of their service accounts. Users retain the private key of these key-pairs, and Google retains ONLY the public key. System-managed keys are automatically rotated by Google, and are used for signing for a maximum of two weeks. The rotation process is probabilistic, and usage of the new key will gradually ramp up and down over the key&#x27;s lifetime. If you cache the public key set for a service account, we recommend that you update the cache every 15 minutes. User-managed keys can be added and removed at any time, so it is important to update the cache frequently. For Google-managed keys, Google will publish a key at least 6 hours before it is first used for signing and will keep publishing it for at least 6 hours after it was last used for signing. Public keys for all service accounts are also published at the OAuth2 Service Account API.
+  &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # The key status.
   &quot;keyAlgorithm&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the algorithm (and possibly key size) for the key.
   &quot;keyOrigin&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The key origin.
   &quot;keyType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The key type.
@@ -205,6 +261,7 @@
     { # The service account keys list response.
   &quot;keys&quot;: [ # The public keys for the service account.
     { # Represents a service account key. A service account has two sets of key-pairs: user-managed, and system-managed. User-managed key-pairs can be created and deleted by users. Users are responsible for rotating these keys periodically to ensure security of their service accounts. Users retain the private key of these key-pairs, and Google retains ONLY the public key. System-managed keys are automatically rotated by Google, and are used for signing for a maximum of two weeks. The rotation process is probabilistic, and usage of the new key will gradually ramp up and down over the key&#x27;s lifetime. If you cache the public key set for a service account, we recommend that you update the cache every 15 minutes. User-managed keys can be added and removed at any time, so it is important to update the cache frequently. For Google-managed keys, Google will publish a key at least 6 hours before it is first used for signing and will keep publishing it for at least 6 hours after it was last used for signing. Public keys for all service accounts are also published at the OAuth2 Service Account API.
+      &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # The key status.
       &quot;keyAlgorithm&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the algorithm (and possibly key size) for the key.
       &quot;keyOrigin&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The key origin.
       &quot;keyType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The key type.
@@ -241,6 +298,7 @@
   An object of the form:
 
     { # Represents a service account key. A service account has two sets of key-pairs: user-managed, and system-managed. User-managed key-pairs can be created and deleted by users. Users are responsible for rotating these keys periodically to ensure security of their service accounts. Users retain the private key of these key-pairs, and Google retains ONLY the public key. System-managed keys are automatically rotated by Google, and are used for signing for a maximum of two weeks. The rotation process is probabilistic, and usage of the new key will gradually ramp up and down over the key&#x27;s lifetime. If you cache the public key set for a service account, we recommend that you update the cache every 15 minutes. User-managed keys can be added and removed at any time, so it is important to update the cache frequently. For Google-managed keys, Google will publish a key at least 6 hours before it is first used for signing and will keep publishing it for at least 6 hours after it was last used for signing. Public keys for all service accounts are also published at the OAuth2 Service Account API.
+  &quot;disabled&quot;: True or False, # The key status.
   &quot;keyAlgorithm&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the algorithm (and possibly key size) for the key.
   &quot;keyOrigin&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The key origin.
   &quot;keyType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The key type.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.html b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..09ad053
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.html
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="ideahub_v1beta.html">Idea Hub API</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html">platforms()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the platforms Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#new_batch_http_request">new_batch_http_request()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="new_batch_http_request">new_batch_http_request()</code>
+  <pre>Create a BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+
+        Args:
+          callback: callable, A callback to be called for each response, of the
+            form callback(id, response, exception). The first parameter is the
+            request id, and the second is the deserialized response object. The
+            third is an apiclient.errors.HttpError exception object if an HTTP
+            error occurred while processing the request, or None if no error
+            occurred.
+
+        Returns:
+          A BatchHttpRequest object based on the discovery document.
+        </pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..075fa6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="ideahub_v1beta.html">Idea Hub API</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html">platforms</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html">properties()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the properties Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d950ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="ideahub_v1beta.html">Idea Hub API</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html">platforms</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html">properties</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideaStates.html">ideaStates()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the ideaStates Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideas.html">ideas()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the ideas Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.locales.html">locales()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the locales Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.topicStates.html">topicStates()</a></code>
+</p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns the topicStates Resource.</p>
+
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideaStates.html b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideaStates.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..329d0d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideaStates.html
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="ideahub_v1beta.html">Idea Hub API</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html">platforms</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html">properties</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideaStates.html">ideaStates</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Update an idea state resource.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Update an idea state resource.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Unique identifier for the idea state. Format: platforms/{platform}/properties/{property}/ideaStates/{idea_state} (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents idea state specific to a web property.
+  &quot;dismissed&quot;: True or False, # Whether the idea is dismissed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier for the idea state. Format: platforms/{platform}/properties/{property}/ideaStates/{idea_state}
+  &quot;saved&quot;: True or False, # Whether the idea is saved.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, The list of fields to be updated.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents idea state specific to a web property.
+  &quot;dismissed&quot;: True or False, # Whether the idea is dismissed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier for the idea state. Format: platforms/{platform}/properties/{property}/ideaStates/{idea_state}
+  &quot;saved&quot;: True or False, # Whether the idea is saved.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideas.html b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideas.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..784163f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideas.html
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="ideahub_v1beta.html">Idea Hub API</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html">platforms</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html">properties</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.ideas.html">ideas</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">List ideas for a given Creator and filter and sort options.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>List ideas for a given Creator and filter and sort options.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. If defined, specifies the creator for which to filter by. Format: publishers/{publisher}/properties/{property} (required)
+  filter: string, Allows filtering. Supported syntax: * Filter expressions are made up of one or more restrictions. * Restrictions are implicitly combined, as if the `AND` operator was always used. The `OR` operator is currently unsupported. * Supported functions: - `saved(bool)`: If set to true, fetches only saved ideas. If set to false, fetches all except saved ideas. Can&#x27;t be simultaneously used with `dismissed(bool)`. - `dismissed(bool)`: If set to true, fetches only dismissed ideas. Can&#x27;t be simultaneously used with `saved(bool)`. The `false` value is currently unsupported. Examples: * `saved(true)` * `saved(false)` * `dismissed(true)` The length of this field should be no more than 500 characters.
+  orderBy: string, Order semantics described below.
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of ideas per page. If unspecified, at most 10 ideas will be returned. The maximum value is 2000; values above 2000 will be coerced to 2000.
+  pageToken: string, Used to fetch next page.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    {
+  &quot;ideas&quot;: [ # Results for the ListIdeasRequest.
+    { # A single Idea that we want to show the end user.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier for the idea. Format: ideas/{ideaId}
+      &quot;text&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The idea’s text.
+      &quot;topics&quot;: [ # The Topics that match the idea.
+        { # Represents a Topic umbrella for a list of questions that a Creator may want to respond to.
+          &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # String displayed to the creator indicating the name of the Topic.
+          &quot;mid&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The mID of the topic.
+          &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier for the topic. Format: topics/{topic}
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Used to fetch the next page in a subsequent request.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.locales.html b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.locales.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dae751b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.locales.html
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="ideahub_v1beta.html">Idea Hub API</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html">platforms</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html">properties</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.locales.html">locales</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Returns which locales ideas are available in for a given Creator.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(parent, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Returns which locales ideas are available in for a given Creator.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The web property to check idea availability for Format: platforms/{platform}/property/{property} (required)
+  pageSize: integer, The maximum number of locales to return. The service may return fewer than this value. If unspecified, at most 100 locales will be returned. The maximum value is 100; values above 100 will be coerced to 100.
+  pageToken: string, A page token, received from a previous `ListAvailableLocales` call. Provide this to retrieve the subsequent page. When paginating, all other parameters provided to `ListAvailableLocales` must match the call that provided the page token.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Response for whether ideas are available for a given web property on a platform, for the currently logged-in user.
+  &quot;availableLocales&quot;: [ # Locales for which ideas are available for the given Creator.
+    { # Represents locales that are available for a web property.
+      &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string in BCP 47 format, without a resource prefix.
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A string in BCP 47 format, prefixed with the platform and property name, and &quot;locales/&quot;. Format: platforms/{platform}/properties/{property}/locales/{locale}
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A token that can be sent as `page_token` to retrieve the next page. If this field is omitted, there are no subsequent pages.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.topicStates.html b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.topicStates.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5704135
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.topicStates.html
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+<html><body>
+<style>
+
+body, h1, h2, h3, div, span, p, pre, a {
+  margin: 0;
+  padding: 0;
+  border: 0;
+  font-weight: inherit;
+  font-style: inherit;
+  font-size: 100%;
+  font-family: inherit;
+  vertical-align: baseline;
+}
+
+body {
+  font-size: 13px;
+  padding: 1em;
+}
+
+h1 {
+  font-size: 26px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h2 {
+  font-size: 24px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+}
+
+h3 {
+  font-size: 20px;
+  margin-bottom: 1em;
+  margin-top: 1em;
+}
+
+pre, code {
+  line-height: 1.5;
+  font-family: Monaco, 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Bitstream Vera Sans Mono', 'Lucida Console', monospace;
+}
+
+pre {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3, p {
+  font-family: Arial, sans serif;
+}
+
+h1, h2, h3 {
+  border-bottom: solid #CCC 1px;
+}
+
+.toc_element {
+  margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+
+.firstline {
+  margin-left: 2 em;
+}
+
+.method  {
+  margin-top: 1em;
+  border: solid 1px #CCC;
+  padding: 1em;
+  background: #EEE;
+}
+
+.details {
+  font-weight: bold;
+  font-size: 14px;
+}
+
+</style>
+
+<h1><a href="ideahub_v1beta.html">Idea Hub API</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.html">platforms</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.html">properties</a> . <a href="ideahub_v1beta.platforms.properties.topicStates.html">topicStates</a></h1>
+<h2>Instance Methods</h2>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Update a topic state resource.</p>
+<h3>Method Details</h3>
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="close">close()</code>
+  <pre>Close httplib2 connections.</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Update a topic state resource.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Unique identifier for the topic state. Format: platforms/{platform}/properties/{property}/topicStates/{topic_state} (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents topic state specific to a web property.
+  &quot;dismissed&quot;: True or False, # Whether the topic is dismissed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier for the topic state. Format: platforms/{platform}/properties/{property}/topicStates/{topic_state}
+  &quot;saved&quot;: True or False, # Whether the topic is saved.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, The list of fields to be updated.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents topic state specific to a web property.
+  &quot;dismissed&quot;: True or False, # Whether the topic is dismissed.
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Unique identifier for the topic state. Format: platforms/{platform}/properties/{property}/topicStates/{topic_state}
+  &quot;saved&quot;: True or False, # Whether the topic is saved.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+</body></html>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/dyn/index.md b/docs/dyn/index.md
index 3e73eb7..532dbfa 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/index.md
+++ b/docs/dyn/index.md
@@ -562,6 +562,7 @@
 
 ## ideahub
 * [v1alpha](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1alpha.html)
+* [v1beta](http://googleapis.github.io/google-api-python-client/docs/dyn/ideahub_v1beta.html)
 
 
 ## identitytoolkit
diff --git a/docs/dyn/jobs_v3p1beta1.projects.jobs.html b/docs/dyn/jobs_v3p1beta1.projects.jobs.html
index acb681d..657eafa 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/jobs_v3p1beta1.projects.jobs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/jobs_v3p1beta1.projects.jobs.html
@@ -1132,7 +1132,7 @@
 { # Input only. The Request body of the `SearchJobs` call.
   &quot;customRankingInfo&quot;: { # Input only. Custom ranking information for SearchJobsRequest. # Optional. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm).
     &quot;importanceLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how important the score of CustomRankingInfo.ranking_expression gets applied to job&#x27;s final ranking position. An error is thrown if not specified.
-    &quot;rankingExpression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm). A combination of the ranking expression and relevance score is used to determine job&#x27;s final ranking position. The syntax for this expression is a subset of Google SQL syntax. Supported operators are: +, -, *, /, where the left and right side of the operator is either a numeric Job.custom_attributes key, integer/double value or an expression that can be evaluated to a number. Parenthesis are supported to adjust calculation precedence. The expression must be &lt; 100 characters in length. The expression is considered invalid for a job if the expression references custom attributes that are not populated on the job or if the expression results in a divide by zero. If an expression is invalid for a job, that job is demoted to the end of the results. Sample ranking expression (year + 25) * 0.25 - (freshness / 0.5)
+    &quot;rankingExpression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm). A combination of the ranking expression and relevance score is used to determine job&#x27;s final ranking position. The syntax for this expression is a subset of Google SQL syntax. Supported operators are: +, -, *, /, where the left and right side of the operator is either a numeric Job.custom_attributes key, integer/double value or an expression that can be evaluated to a number. Parenthesis are supported to adjust calculation precedence. The expression must be &lt; 200 characters in length. The expression is considered invalid for a job if the expression references custom attributes that are not populated on the job or if the expression results in a divide by zero. If an expression is invalid for a job, that job is demoted to the end of the results. Sample ranking expression (year + 25) * 0.25 - (freshness / 0.5)
   },
   &quot;disableKeywordMatch&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Controls whether to disable exact keyword match on Job.job_title, Job.description, Job.company_display_name, Job.locations, Job.qualifications. When disable keyword match is turned off, a keyword match returns jobs that do not match given category filters when there are matching keywords. For example, the query &quot;program manager,&quot; a result is returned even if the job posting has the title &quot;software developer,&quot; which does not fall into &quot;program manager&quot; ontology, but does have &quot;program manager&quot; appearing in its description. For queries like &quot;cloud&quot; that does not contain title or location specific ontology, jobs with &quot;cloud&quot; keyword matches are returned regardless of this flag&#x27;s value. Please use Company.keyword_searchable_custom_fields or Company.keyword_searchable_custom_attributes if company specific globally matched custom field/attribute string values is needed. Enabling keyword match improves recall of subsequent search requests. Defaults to false.
   &quot;diversificationLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Controls whether highly similar jobs are returned next to each other in the search results. Jobs are identified as highly similar based on their titles, job categories, and locations. Highly similar results are clustered so that only one representative job of the cluster is displayed to the job seeker higher up in the results, with the other jobs being displayed lower down in the results. Defaults to DiversificationLevel.SIMPLE if no value is specified.
@@ -1559,7 +1559,7 @@
 { # Input only. The Request body of the `SearchJobs` call.
   &quot;customRankingInfo&quot;: { # Input only. Custom ranking information for SearchJobsRequest. # Optional. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm).
     &quot;importanceLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how important the score of CustomRankingInfo.ranking_expression gets applied to job&#x27;s final ranking position. An error is thrown if not specified.
-    &quot;rankingExpression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm). A combination of the ranking expression and relevance score is used to determine job&#x27;s final ranking position. The syntax for this expression is a subset of Google SQL syntax. Supported operators are: +, -, *, /, where the left and right side of the operator is either a numeric Job.custom_attributes key, integer/double value or an expression that can be evaluated to a number. Parenthesis are supported to adjust calculation precedence. The expression must be &lt; 100 characters in length. The expression is considered invalid for a job if the expression references custom attributes that are not populated on the job or if the expression results in a divide by zero. If an expression is invalid for a job, that job is demoted to the end of the results. Sample ranking expression (year + 25) * 0.25 - (freshness / 0.5)
+    &quot;rankingExpression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm). A combination of the ranking expression and relevance score is used to determine job&#x27;s final ranking position. The syntax for this expression is a subset of Google SQL syntax. Supported operators are: +, -, *, /, where the left and right side of the operator is either a numeric Job.custom_attributes key, integer/double value or an expression that can be evaluated to a number. Parenthesis are supported to adjust calculation precedence. The expression must be &lt; 200 characters in length. The expression is considered invalid for a job if the expression references custom attributes that are not populated on the job or if the expression results in a divide by zero. If an expression is invalid for a job, that job is demoted to the end of the results. Sample ranking expression (year + 25) * 0.25 - (freshness / 0.5)
   },
   &quot;disableKeywordMatch&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Controls whether to disable exact keyword match on Job.job_title, Job.description, Job.company_display_name, Job.locations, Job.qualifications. When disable keyword match is turned off, a keyword match returns jobs that do not match given category filters when there are matching keywords. For example, the query &quot;program manager,&quot; a result is returned even if the job posting has the title &quot;software developer,&quot; which does not fall into &quot;program manager&quot; ontology, but does have &quot;program manager&quot; appearing in its description. For queries like &quot;cloud&quot; that does not contain title or location specific ontology, jobs with &quot;cloud&quot; keyword matches are returned regardless of this flag&#x27;s value. Please use Company.keyword_searchable_custom_fields or Company.keyword_searchable_custom_attributes if company specific globally matched custom field/attribute string values is needed. Enabling keyword match improves recall of subsequent search requests. Defaults to false.
   &quot;diversificationLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Optional. Controls whether highly similar jobs are returned next to each other in the search results. Jobs are identified as highly similar based on their titles, job categories, and locations. Highly similar results are clustered so that only one representative job of the cluster is displayed to the job seeker higher up in the results, with the other jobs being displayed lower down in the results. Defaults to DiversificationLevel.SIMPLE if no value is specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/jobs_v4.projects.tenants.jobs.html b/docs/dyn/jobs_v4.projects.tenants.jobs.html
index 7337c8b..822f159 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/jobs_v4.projects.tenants.jobs.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/jobs_v4.projects.tenants.jobs.html
@@ -1532,9 +1532,9 @@
 { # The Request body of the `SearchJobs` call.
   &quot;customRankingInfo&quot;: { # Custom ranking information for SearchJobsRequest. # Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm).
     &quot;importanceLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how important the score of CustomRankingInfo.ranking_expression gets applied to job&#x27;s final ranking position. An error is thrown if not specified.
-    &quot;rankingExpression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm). A combination of the ranking expression and relevance score is used to determine job&#x27;s final ranking position. The syntax for this expression is a subset of Google SQL syntax. Supported operators are: +, -, *, /, where the left and right side of the operator is either a numeric Job.custom_attributes key, integer/double value or an expression that can be evaluated to a number. Parenthesis are supported to adjust calculation precedence. The expression must be &lt; 100 characters in length. The expression is considered invalid for a job if the expression references custom attributes that are not populated on the job or if the expression results in a divide by zero. If an expression is invalid for a job, that job is demoted to the end of the results. Sample ranking expression (year + 25) * 0.25 - (freshness / 0.5)
+    &quot;rankingExpression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm). A combination of the ranking expression and relevance score is used to determine job&#x27;s final ranking position. The syntax for this expression is a subset of Google SQL syntax. Supported operators are: +, -, *, /, where the left and right side of the operator is either a numeric Job.custom_attributes key, integer/double value or an expression that can be evaluated to a number. Parenthesis are supported to adjust calculation precedence. The expression must be &lt; 200 characters in length. The expression is considered invalid for a job if the expression references custom attributes that are not populated on the job or if the expression results in a divide by zero. If an expression is invalid for a job, that job is demoted to the end of the results. Sample ranking expression (year + 25) * 0.25 - (freshness / 0.5)
   },
-  &quot;disableKeywordMatch&quot;: True or False, # Controls whether to disable exact keyword match on Job.title, Job.description, Job.company_display_name, Job.addresses, Job.qualifications. When disable keyword match is turned off, a keyword match returns jobs that do not match given category filters when there are matching keywords. For example, for the query &quot;program manager,&quot; a result is returned even if the job posting has the title &quot;software developer,&quot; which doesn&#x27;t fall into &quot;program manager&quot; ontology, but does have &quot;program manager&quot; appearing in its description. For queries like &quot;cloud&quot; that don&#x27;t contain title or location specific ontology, jobs with &quot;cloud&quot; keyword matches are returned regardless of this flag&#x27;s value. Use Company.keyword_searchable_job_custom_attributes if company-specific globally matched custom field/attribute string values are needed. Enabling keyword match improves recall of subsequent search requests. Defaults to false.
+  &quot;disableKeywordMatch&quot;: True or False, # This field is deprecated. Please use SearchJobsRequest.keyword_match_mode going forward. To migrate, disable_keyword_match set to false maps to KeywordMatchMode.KEYWORD_MATCH_ALL, and disable_keyword_match set to true maps to KeywordMatchMode.KEYWORD_MATCH_DISABLED. If SearchJobsRequest.keyword_match_mode is set, this field is ignored. Controls whether to disable exact keyword match on Job.title, Job.description, Job.company_display_name, Job.addresses, Job.qualifications. When disable keyword match is turned off, a keyword match returns jobs that do not match given category filters when there are matching keywords. For example, for the query &quot;program manager,&quot; a result is returned even if the job posting has the title &quot;software developer,&quot; which doesn&#x27;t fall into &quot;program manager&quot; ontology, but does have &quot;program manager&quot; appearing in its description. For queries like &quot;cloud&quot; that don&#x27;t contain title or location specific ontology, jobs with &quot;cloud&quot; keyword matches are returned regardless of this flag&#x27;s value. Use Company.keyword_searchable_job_custom_attributes if company-specific globally matched custom field/attribute string values are needed. Enabling keyword match improves recall of subsequent search requests. Defaults to false.
   &quot;diversificationLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Controls whether highly similar jobs are returned next to each other in the search results. Jobs are identified as highly similar based on their titles, job categories, and locations. Highly similar results are clustered so that only one representative job of the cluster is displayed to the job seeker higher up in the results, with the other jobs being displayed lower down in the results. Defaults to DiversificationLevel.SIMPLE if no value is specified.
   &quot;enableBroadening&quot;: True or False, # Controls whether to broaden the search when it produces sparse results. Broadened queries append results to the end of the matching results list. Defaults to false.
   &quot;histogramQueries&quot;: [ # An expression specifies a histogram request against matching jobs. Expression syntax is an aggregation function call with histogram facets and other options. Available aggregation function calls are: * `count(string_histogram_facet)`: Count the number of matching entities, for each distinct attribute value. * `count(numeric_histogram_facet, list of buckets)`: Count the number of matching entities within each bucket. Data types: * Histogram facet: facet names with format a-zA-Z+. * String: string like &quot;any string with backslash escape for quote(\&quot;).&quot; * Number: whole number and floating point number like 10, -1 and -0.01. * List: list of elements with comma(,) separator surrounded by square brackets, for example, [1, 2, 3] and [&quot;one&quot;, &quot;two&quot;, &quot;three&quot;]. Built-in constants: * MIN (minimum number similar to java Double.MIN_VALUE) * MAX (maximum number similar to java Double.MAX_VALUE) Built-in functions: * bucket(start, end[, label]): bucket built-in function creates a bucket with range of start, end). Note that the end is exclusive, for example, bucket(1, MAX, &quot;positive number&quot;) or bucket(1, 10). Job histogram facets: * company_display_name: histogram by [Job.company_display_name. * employment_type: histogram by Job.employment_types, for example, &quot;FULL_TIME&quot;, &quot;PART_TIME&quot;. * company_size: histogram by CompanySize, for example, &quot;SMALL&quot;, &quot;MEDIUM&quot;, &quot;BIG&quot;. * publish_time_in_day: histogram by the Job.posting_publish_time in days. Must specify list of numeric buckets in spec. * publish_time_in_month: histogram by the Job.posting_publish_time in months. Must specify list of numeric buckets in spec. * publish_time_in_year: histogram by the Job.posting_publish_time in years. Must specify list of numeric buckets in spec. * degree_types: histogram by the Job.degree_types, for example, &quot;Bachelors&quot;, &quot;Masters&quot;. * job_level: histogram by the Job.job_level, for example, &quot;Entry Level&quot;. * country: histogram by the country code of jobs, for example, &quot;US&quot;, &quot;FR&quot;. * admin1: histogram by the admin1 code of jobs, which is a global placeholder referring to the state, province, or the particular term a country uses to define the geographic structure below the country level, for example, &quot;CA&quot;, &quot;IL&quot;. * city: histogram by a combination of the &quot;city name, admin1 code&quot;. For example, &quot;Mountain View, CA&quot;, &quot;New York, NY&quot;. * admin1_country: histogram by a combination of the &quot;admin1 code, country&quot;, for example, &quot;CA, US&quot;, &quot;IL, US&quot;. * city_coordinate: histogram by the city center&#x27;s GPS coordinates (latitude and longitude), for example, 37.4038522,-122.0987765. Since the coordinates of a city center can change, customers may need to refresh them periodically. * locale: histogram by the Job.language_code, for example, &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-FR&quot;. * language: histogram by the language subtag of the Job.language_code, for example, &quot;en&quot;, &quot;fr&quot;. * category: histogram by the JobCategory, for example, &quot;COMPUTER_AND_IT&quot;, &quot;HEALTHCARE&quot;. * base_compensation_unit: histogram by the CompensationInfo.CompensationUnit of base salary, for example, &quot;WEEKLY&quot;, &quot;MONTHLY&quot;. * base_compensation: histogram by the base salary. Must specify list of numeric buckets to group results by. * annualized_base_compensation: histogram by the base annualized salary. Must specify list of numeric buckets to group results by. * annualized_total_compensation: histogram by the total annualized salary. Must specify list of numeric buckets to group results by. * string_custom_attribute: histogram by string Job.custom_attributes. Values can be accessed via square bracket notations like string_custom_attribute[&quot;key1&quot;]. * numeric_custom_attribute: histogram by numeric Job.custom_attributes. Values can be accessed via square bracket notations like numeric_custom_attribute[&quot;key1&quot;]. Must specify list of numeric buckets to group results by. Example expressions: * `count(admin1)` * `count(base_compensation, [bucket(1000, 10000), bucket(10000, 100000), bucket(100000, MAX)])` * `count(string_custom_attribute[&quot;some-string-custom-attribute&quot;])` * `count(numeric_custom_attribute[&quot;some-numeric-custom-attribute&quot;], [bucket(MIN, 0, &quot;negative&quot;), bucket(0, MAX, &quot;non-negative&quot;)])`
@@ -1618,6 +1618,7 @@
     &quot;queryLanguageCode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The language code of query. For example, &quot;en-US&quot;. This field helps to better interpret the query. If a value isn&#x27;t specified, the query language code is automatically detected, which may not be accurate. Language code should be in BCP-47 format, such as &quot;en-US&quot; or &quot;sr-Latn&quot;. For more information, see [Tags for Identifying Languages](https://tools.ietf.org/html/bcp47).
   },
   &quot;jobView&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The desired job attributes returned for jobs in the search response. Defaults to JobView.JOB_VIEW_SMALL if no value is specified.
+  &quot;keywordMatchMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Controls what keyword match options to use. If both keyword_match_mode and disable_keyword_match are set, keyword_match_mode will take precedence. Defaults to KeywordMatchMode.KEYWORD_MATCH_ALL if no value is specified.
   &quot;maxPageSize&quot;: 42, # A limit on the number of jobs returned in the search results. Increasing this value above the default value of 10 can increase search response time. The value can be between 1 and 100.
   &quot;offset&quot;: 42, # An integer that specifies the current offset (that is, starting result location, amongst the jobs deemed by the API as relevant) in search results. This field is only considered if page_token is unset. The maximum allowed value is 5000. Otherwise an error is thrown. For example, 0 means to return results starting from the first matching job, and 10 means to return from the 11th job. This can be used for pagination, (for example, pageSize = 10 and offset = 10 means to return from the second page).
   &quot;orderBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The criteria determining how search results are sorted. Default is `&quot;relevance desc&quot;`. Supported options are: * `&quot;relevance desc&quot;`: By relevance descending, as determined by the API algorithms. Relevance thresholding of query results is only available with this ordering. * `&quot;posting_publish_time desc&quot;`: By Job.posting_publish_time descending. * `&quot;posting_update_time desc&quot;`: By Job.posting_update_time descending. * `&quot;title&quot;`: By Job.title ascending. * `&quot;title desc&quot;`: By Job.title descending. * `&quot;annualized_base_compensation&quot;`: By job&#x27;s CompensationInfo.annualized_base_compensation_range ascending. Jobs whose annualized base compensation is unspecified are put at the end of search results. * `&quot;annualized_base_compensation desc&quot;`: By job&#x27;s CompensationInfo.annualized_base_compensation_range descending. Jobs whose annualized base compensation is unspecified are put at the end of search results. * `&quot;annualized_total_compensation&quot;`: By job&#x27;s CompensationInfo.annualized_total_compensation_range ascending. Jobs whose annualized base compensation is unspecified are put at the end of search results. * `&quot;annualized_total_compensation desc&quot;`: By job&#x27;s CompensationInfo.annualized_total_compensation_range descending. Jobs whose annualized base compensation is unspecified are put at the end of search results. * `&quot;custom_ranking desc&quot;`: By the relevance score adjusted to the SearchJobsRequest.CustomRankingInfo.ranking_expression with weight factor assigned by SearchJobsRequest.CustomRankingInfo.importance_level in descending order. * Location sorting: Use the special syntax to order jobs by distance: `&quot;distance_from(&#x27;Hawaii&#x27;)&quot;`: Order by distance from Hawaii. `&quot;distance_from(19.89, 155.5)&quot;`: Order by distance from a coordinate. `&quot;distance_from(&#x27;Hawaii&#x27;), distance_from(&#x27;Puerto Rico&#x27;)&quot;`: Order by multiple locations. See details below. `&quot;distance_from(&#x27;Hawaii&#x27;), distance_from(19.89, 155.5)&quot;`: Order by multiple locations. See details below. The string can have a maximum of 256 characters. When multiple distance centers are provided, a job that is close to any of the distance centers would have a high rank. When a job has multiple locations, the job location closest to one of the distance centers will be used. Jobs that don&#x27;t have locations will be ranked at the bottom. Distance is calculated with a precision of 11.3 meters (37.4 feet). Diversification strategy is still applied unless explicitly disabled in diversification_level.
@@ -1883,9 +1884,9 @@
 { # The Request body of the `SearchJobs` call.
   &quot;customRankingInfo&quot;: { # Custom ranking information for SearchJobsRequest. # Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm).
     &quot;importanceLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how important the score of CustomRankingInfo.ranking_expression gets applied to job&#x27;s final ranking position. An error is thrown if not specified.
-    &quot;rankingExpression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm). A combination of the ranking expression and relevance score is used to determine job&#x27;s final ranking position. The syntax for this expression is a subset of Google SQL syntax. Supported operators are: +, -, *, /, where the left and right side of the operator is either a numeric Job.custom_attributes key, integer/double value or an expression that can be evaluated to a number. Parenthesis are supported to adjust calculation precedence. The expression must be &lt; 100 characters in length. The expression is considered invalid for a job if the expression references custom attributes that are not populated on the job or if the expression results in a divide by zero. If an expression is invalid for a job, that job is demoted to the end of the results. Sample ranking expression (year + 25) * 0.25 - (freshness / 0.5)
+    &quot;rankingExpression&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Controls over how job documents get ranked on top of existing relevance score (determined by API algorithm). A combination of the ranking expression and relevance score is used to determine job&#x27;s final ranking position. The syntax for this expression is a subset of Google SQL syntax. Supported operators are: +, -, *, /, where the left and right side of the operator is either a numeric Job.custom_attributes key, integer/double value or an expression that can be evaluated to a number. Parenthesis are supported to adjust calculation precedence. The expression must be &lt; 200 characters in length. The expression is considered invalid for a job if the expression references custom attributes that are not populated on the job or if the expression results in a divide by zero. If an expression is invalid for a job, that job is demoted to the end of the results. Sample ranking expression (year + 25) * 0.25 - (freshness / 0.5)
   },
-  &quot;disableKeywordMatch&quot;: True or False, # Controls whether to disable exact keyword match on Job.title, Job.description, Job.company_display_name, Job.addresses, Job.qualifications. When disable keyword match is turned off, a keyword match returns jobs that do not match given category filters when there are matching keywords. For example, for the query &quot;program manager,&quot; a result is returned even if the job posting has the title &quot;software developer,&quot; which doesn&#x27;t fall into &quot;program manager&quot; ontology, but does have &quot;program manager&quot; appearing in its description. For queries like &quot;cloud&quot; that don&#x27;t contain title or location specific ontology, jobs with &quot;cloud&quot; keyword matches are returned regardless of this flag&#x27;s value. Use Company.keyword_searchable_job_custom_attributes if company-specific globally matched custom field/attribute string values are needed. Enabling keyword match improves recall of subsequent search requests. Defaults to false.
+  &quot;disableKeywordMatch&quot;: True or False, # This field is deprecated. Please use SearchJobsRequest.keyword_match_mode going forward. To migrate, disable_keyword_match set to false maps to KeywordMatchMode.KEYWORD_MATCH_ALL, and disable_keyword_match set to true maps to KeywordMatchMode.KEYWORD_MATCH_DISABLED. If SearchJobsRequest.keyword_match_mode is set, this field is ignored. Controls whether to disable exact keyword match on Job.title, Job.description, Job.company_display_name, Job.addresses, Job.qualifications. When disable keyword match is turned off, a keyword match returns jobs that do not match given category filters when there are matching keywords. For example, for the query &quot;program manager,&quot; a result is returned even if the job posting has the title &quot;software developer,&quot; which doesn&#x27;t fall into &quot;program manager&quot; ontology, but does have &quot;program manager&quot; appearing in its description. For queries like &quot;cloud&quot; that don&#x27;t contain title or location specific ontology, jobs with &quot;cloud&quot; keyword matches are returned regardless of this flag&#x27;s value. Use Company.keyword_searchable_job_custom_attributes if company-specific globally matched custom field/attribute string values are needed. Enabling keyword match improves recall of subsequent search requests. Defaults to false.
   &quot;diversificationLevel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Controls whether highly similar jobs are returned next to each other in the search results. Jobs are identified as highly similar based on their titles, job categories, and locations. Highly similar results are clustered so that only one representative job of the cluster is displayed to the job seeker higher up in the results, with the other jobs being displayed lower down in the results. Defaults to DiversificationLevel.SIMPLE if no value is specified.
   &quot;enableBroadening&quot;: True or False, # Controls whether to broaden the search when it produces sparse results. Broadened queries append results to the end of the matching results list. Defaults to false.
   &quot;histogramQueries&quot;: [ # An expression specifies a histogram request against matching jobs. Expression syntax is an aggregation function call with histogram facets and other options. Available aggregation function calls are: * `count(string_histogram_facet)`: Count the number of matching entities, for each distinct attribute value. * `count(numeric_histogram_facet, list of buckets)`: Count the number of matching entities within each bucket. Data types: * Histogram facet: facet names with format a-zA-Z+. * String: string like &quot;any string with backslash escape for quote(\&quot;).&quot; * Number: whole number and floating point number like 10, -1 and -0.01. * List: list of elements with comma(,) separator surrounded by square brackets, for example, [1, 2, 3] and [&quot;one&quot;, &quot;two&quot;, &quot;three&quot;]. Built-in constants: * MIN (minimum number similar to java Double.MIN_VALUE) * MAX (maximum number similar to java Double.MAX_VALUE) Built-in functions: * bucket(start, end[, label]): bucket built-in function creates a bucket with range of start, end). Note that the end is exclusive, for example, bucket(1, MAX, &quot;positive number&quot;) or bucket(1, 10). Job histogram facets: * company_display_name: histogram by [Job.company_display_name. * employment_type: histogram by Job.employment_types, for example, &quot;FULL_TIME&quot;, &quot;PART_TIME&quot;. * company_size: histogram by CompanySize, for example, &quot;SMALL&quot;, &quot;MEDIUM&quot;, &quot;BIG&quot;. * publish_time_in_day: histogram by the Job.posting_publish_time in days. Must specify list of numeric buckets in spec. * publish_time_in_month: histogram by the Job.posting_publish_time in months. Must specify list of numeric buckets in spec. * publish_time_in_year: histogram by the Job.posting_publish_time in years. Must specify list of numeric buckets in spec. * degree_types: histogram by the Job.degree_types, for example, &quot;Bachelors&quot;, &quot;Masters&quot;. * job_level: histogram by the Job.job_level, for example, &quot;Entry Level&quot;. * country: histogram by the country code of jobs, for example, &quot;US&quot;, &quot;FR&quot;. * admin1: histogram by the admin1 code of jobs, which is a global placeholder referring to the state, province, or the particular term a country uses to define the geographic structure below the country level, for example, &quot;CA&quot;, &quot;IL&quot;. * city: histogram by a combination of the &quot;city name, admin1 code&quot;. For example, &quot;Mountain View, CA&quot;, &quot;New York, NY&quot;. * admin1_country: histogram by a combination of the &quot;admin1 code, country&quot;, for example, &quot;CA, US&quot;, &quot;IL, US&quot;. * city_coordinate: histogram by the city center&#x27;s GPS coordinates (latitude and longitude), for example, 37.4038522,-122.0987765. Since the coordinates of a city center can change, customers may need to refresh them periodically. * locale: histogram by the Job.language_code, for example, &quot;en-US&quot;, &quot;fr-FR&quot;. * language: histogram by the language subtag of the Job.language_code, for example, &quot;en&quot;, &quot;fr&quot;. * category: histogram by the JobCategory, for example, &quot;COMPUTER_AND_IT&quot;, &quot;HEALTHCARE&quot;. * base_compensation_unit: histogram by the CompensationInfo.CompensationUnit of base salary, for example, &quot;WEEKLY&quot;, &quot;MONTHLY&quot;. * base_compensation: histogram by the base salary. Must specify list of numeric buckets to group results by. * annualized_base_compensation: histogram by the base annualized salary. Must specify list of numeric buckets to group results by. * annualized_total_compensation: histogram by the total annualized salary. Must specify list of numeric buckets to group results by. * string_custom_attribute: histogram by string Job.custom_attributes. Values can be accessed via square bracket notations like string_custom_attribute[&quot;key1&quot;]. * numeric_custom_attribute: histogram by numeric Job.custom_attributes. Values can be accessed via square bracket notations like numeric_custom_attribute[&quot;key1&quot;]. Must specify list of numeric buckets to group results by. Example expressions: * `count(admin1)` * `count(base_compensation, [bucket(1000, 10000), bucket(10000, 100000), bucket(100000, MAX)])` * `count(string_custom_attribute[&quot;some-string-custom-attribute&quot;])` * `count(numeric_custom_attribute[&quot;some-numeric-custom-attribute&quot;], [bucket(MIN, 0, &quot;negative&quot;), bucket(0, MAX, &quot;non-negative&quot;)])`
@@ -1969,6 +1970,7 @@
     &quot;queryLanguageCode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The language code of query. For example, &quot;en-US&quot;. This field helps to better interpret the query. If a value isn&#x27;t specified, the query language code is automatically detected, which may not be accurate. Language code should be in BCP-47 format, such as &quot;en-US&quot; or &quot;sr-Latn&quot;. For more information, see [Tags for Identifying Languages](https://tools.ietf.org/html/bcp47).
   },
   &quot;jobView&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The desired job attributes returned for jobs in the search response. Defaults to JobView.JOB_VIEW_SMALL if no value is specified.
+  &quot;keywordMatchMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Controls what keyword match options to use. If both keyword_match_mode and disable_keyword_match are set, keyword_match_mode will take precedence. Defaults to KeywordMatchMode.KEYWORD_MATCH_ALL if no value is specified.
   &quot;maxPageSize&quot;: 42, # A limit on the number of jobs returned in the search results. Increasing this value above the default value of 10 can increase search response time. The value can be between 1 and 100.
   &quot;offset&quot;: 42, # An integer that specifies the current offset (that is, starting result location, amongst the jobs deemed by the API as relevant) in search results. This field is only considered if page_token is unset. The maximum allowed value is 5000. Otherwise an error is thrown. For example, 0 means to return results starting from the first matching job, and 10 means to return from the 11th job. This can be used for pagination, (for example, pageSize = 10 and offset = 10 means to return from the second page).
   &quot;orderBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The criteria determining how search results are sorted. Default is `&quot;relevance desc&quot;`. Supported options are: * `&quot;relevance desc&quot;`: By relevance descending, as determined by the API algorithms. Relevance thresholding of query results is only available with this ordering. * `&quot;posting_publish_time desc&quot;`: By Job.posting_publish_time descending. * `&quot;posting_update_time desc&quot;`: By Job.posting_update_time descending. * `&quot;title&quot;`: By Job.title ascending. * `&quot;title desc&quot;`: By Job.title descending. * `&quot;annualized_base_compensation&quot;`: By job&#x27;s CompensationInfo.annualized_base_compensation_range ascending. Jobs whose annualized base compensation is unspecified are put at the end of search results. * `&quot;annualized_base_compensation desc&quot;`: By job&#x27;s CompensationInfo.annualized_base_compensation_range descending. Jobs whose annualized base compensation is unspecified are put at the end of search results. * `&quot;annualized_total_compensation&quot;`: By job&#x27;s CompensationInfo.annualized_total_compensation_range ascending. Jobs whose annualized base compensation is unspecified are put at the end of search results. * `&quot;annualized_total_compensation desc&quot;`: By job&#x27;s CompensationInfo.annualized_total_compensation_range descending. Jobs whose annualized base compensation is unspecified are put at the end of search results. * `&quot;custom_ranking desc&quot;`: By the relevance score adjusted to the SearchJobsRequest.CustomRankingInfo.ranking_expression with weight factor assigned by SearchJobsRequest.CustomRankingInfo.importance_level in descending order. * Location sorting: Use the special syntax to order jobs by distance: `&quot;distance_from(&#x27;Hawaii&#x27;)&quot;`: Order by distance from Hawaii. `&quot;distance_from(19.89, 155.5)&quot;`: Order by distance from a coordinate. `&quot;distance_from(&#x27;Hawaii&#x27;), distance_from(&#x27;Puerto Rico&#x27;)&quot;`: Order by multiple locations. See details below. `&quot;distance_from(&#x27;Hawaii&#x27;), distance_from(19.89, 155.5)&quot;`: Order by multiple locations. See details below. The string can have a maximum of 256 characters. When multiple distance centers are provided, a job that is close to any of the distance centers would have a high rank. When a job has multiple locations, the job location closest to one of the distance centers will be used. Jobs that don&#x27;t have locations will be ranked at the bottom. Distance is calculated with a precision of 11.3 meters (37.4 feet). Diversification strategy is still applied unless explicitly disabled in diversification_level.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/managedidentities_v1.projects.locations.global_.peerings.html b/docs/dyn/managedidentities_v1.projects.locations.global_.peerings.html
index 03aac22..e177533 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/managedidentities_v1.projects.locations.global_.peerings.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/managedidentities_v1.projects.locations.global_.peerings.html
@@ -78,9 +78,27 @@
   <code><a href="#close">close()</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#create">create(parent, body=None, peeringId=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a Peering for Managed AD instance.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Deletes identified Peering.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Gets details of a single Peering.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Lists Peerings in a given project.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Retrieves the next page of results.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
+  <code><a href="#patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
+<p class="firstline">Updates the labels for specified Peering.</p>
+<p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
@@ -93,6 +111,121 @@
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="create">create(parent, body=None, peeringId=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Creates a Peering for Managed AD instance.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. Resource project name and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a Managed Service for Microsoft Active Directory Peering.
+  &quot;authorizedNetwork&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The full names of the Google Compute Engine [networks](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the instance is connected. Caller needs to make sure that CIDR subnets do not overlap between networks, else peering creation will fail.
+  &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time the instance was created.
+  &quot;domainResource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Full domain resource path for the Managed AD Domain involved in peering. The resource path should be in the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/domains/{domain_name}`
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Unique name of the peering in this scope including projects and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/peerings/{peering_id}`.
+  &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this Peering.
+  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this peering, if available.
+  &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Last update time.
+}
+
+  peeringId: string, Required. Peering Id, unique name to identify peering.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  &quot;done&quot;: True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  &quot;response&quot;: { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Deletes identified Peering.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Peering resource name using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/peerings/{peering_id}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  &quot;done&quot;: True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  &quot;response&quot;: { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="get">get(name, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Gets details of a single Peering.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Required. Peering resource name using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/peerings/{peering_id}` (required)
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # Represents a Managed Service for Microsoft Active Directory Peering.
+  &quot;authorizedNetwork&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The full names of the Google Compute Engine [networks](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the instance is connected. Caller needs to make sure that CIDR subnets do not overlap between networks, else peering creation will fail.
+  &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time the instance was created.
+  &quot;domainResource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Full domain resource path for the Managed AD Domain involved in peering. The resource path should be in the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/domains/{domain_name}`
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Unique name of the peering in this scope including projects and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/peerings/{peering_id}`.
+  &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this Peering.
+  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this peering, if available.
+  &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Last update time.
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="getIamPolicy">getIamPolicy(resource, options_requestedPolicyVersion=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
   <pre>Gets the access control policy for a resource. Returns an empty policy if the resource exists and does not have a policy set.
 
@@ -128,6 +261,112 @@
 </div>
 
 <div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list">list(parent, filter=None, orderBy=None, pageSize=None, pageToken=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Lists Peerings in a given project.
+
+Args:
+  parent: string, Required. The resource name of the peering location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global` (required)
+  filter: string, Optional. Filter specifying constraints of a list operation. For example, `peering.authorized_network=&quot;projects/myprojectid/global/networks/mynetwork&quot;`.
+  orderBy: string, Optional. Specifies the ordering of results following syntax at https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/design_patterns#sorting_order.
+  pageSize: integer, Optional. The maximum number of items to return. If not specified, a default value of 1000 will be used by the service. Regardless of the page_size value, the response may include a partial list and a caller should only rely on response&#x27;s next_page_token to determine if there are more instances left to be queried.
+  pageToken: string, Optional. The next_page_token value returned from a previous List request, if any.
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # ListPeeringsResponse is the response message for ListPeerings method.
+  &quot;nextPageToken&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Token to retrieve the next page of results, or empty if there are no more results in the list.
+  &quot;peerings&quot;: [ # A list of Managed Identities Service Peerings in the project.
+    { # Represents a Managed Service for Microsoft Active Directory Peering.
+      &quot;authorizedNetwork&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The full names of the Google Compute Engine [networks](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the instance is connected. Caller needs to make sure that CIDR subnets do not overlap between networks, else peering creation will fail.
+      &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time the instance was created.
+      &quot;domainResource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Full domain resource path for the Managed AD Domain involved in peering. The resource path should be in the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/domains/{domain_name}`
+      &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+      },
+      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Unique name of the peering in this scope including projects and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/peerings/{peering_id}`.
+      &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this Peering.
+      &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this peering, if available.
+      &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Last update time.
+    },
+  ],
+  &quot;unreachable&quot;: [ # Locations that could not be reached.
+    &quot;A String&quot;,
+  ],
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="list_next">list_next(previous_request, previous_response)</code>
+  <pre>Retrieves the next page of results.
+
+Args:
+  previous_request: The request for the previous page. (required)
+  previous_response: The response from the request for the previous page. (required)
+
+Returns:
+  A request object that you can call &#x27;execute()&#x27; on to request the next
+  page. Returns None if there are no more items in the collection.
+    </pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
+    <code class="details" id="patch">patch(name, body=None, updateMask=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
+  <pre>Updates the labels for specified Peering.
+
+Args:
+  name: string, Output only. Unique name of the peering in this scope including projects and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/peerings/{peering_id}`. (required)
+  body: object, The request body.
+    The object takes the form of:
+
+{ # Represents a Managed Service for Microsoft Active Directory Peering.
+  &quot;authorizedNetwork&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. The full names of the Google Compute Engine [networks](/compute/docs/networks-and-firewalls#networks) to which the instance is connected. Caller needs to make sure that CIDR subnets do not overlap between networks, else peering creation will fail.
+  &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The time the instance was created.
+  &quot;domainResource&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. Full domain resource path for the Managed AD Domain involved in peering. The resource path should be in the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/domains/{domain_name}`
+  &quot;labels&quot;: { # Optional. Resource labels to represent user-provided metadata.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Unique name of the peering in this scope including projects and location using the form: `projects/{project_id}/locations/global/peerings/{peering_id}`.
+  &quot;state&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The current state of this Peering.
+  &quot;statusMessage&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Additional information about the current status of this peering, if available.
+  &quot;updateTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. Last update time.
+}
+
+  updateMask: string, Required. Mask of fields to update. At least one path must be supplied in this field. The elements of the repeated paths field may only include these fields from Peering: * `labels`
+  x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
+    Allowed values
+      1 - v1 error format
+      2 - v2 error format
+
+Returns:
+  An object of the form:
+
+    { # This resource represents a long-running operation that is the result of a network API call.
+  &quot;done&quot;: True or False, # If the value is `false`, it means the operation is still in progress. If `true`, the operation is completed, and either `error` or `response` is available.
+  &quot;error&quot;: { # The `Status` type defines a logical error model that is suitable for different programming environments, including REST APIs and RPC APIs. It is used by [gRPC](https://github.com/grpc). Each `Status` message contains three pieces of data: error code, error message, and error details. You can find out more about this error model and how to work with it in the [API Design Guide](https://cloud.google.com/apis/design/errors). # The error result of the operation in case of failure or cancellation.
+    &quot;code&quot;: 42, # The status code, which should be an enum value of google.rpc.Code.
+    &quot;details&quot;: [ # A list of messages that carry the error details. There is a common set of message types for APIs to use.
+      {
+        &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+      },
+    ],
+    &quot;message&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # A developer-facing error message, which should be in English. Any user-facing error message should be localized and sent in the google.rpc.Status.details field, or localized by the client.
+  },
+  &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Service-specific metadata associated with the operation. It typically contains progress information and common metadata such as create time. Some services might not provide such metadata. Any method that returns a long-running operation should document the metadata type, if any.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+  &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The server-assigned name, which is only unique within the same service that originally returns it. If you use the default HTTP mapping, the `name` should be a resource name ending with `operations/{unique_id}`.
+  &quot;response&quot;: { # The normal response of the operation in case of success. If the original method returns no data on success, such as `Delete`, the response is `google.protobuf.Empty`. If the original method is standard `Get`/`Create`/`Update`, the response should be the resource. For other methods, the response should have the type `XxxResponse`, where `Xxx` is the original method name. For example, if the original method name is `TakeSnapshot()`, the inferred response type is `TakeSnapshotResponse`.
+    &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;&quot;, # Properties of the object. Contains field @type with type URL.
+  },
+}</pre>
+</div>
+
+<div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="setIamPolicy">setIamPolicy(resource, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
   <pre>Sets the access control policy on the specified resource. Replaces any existing policy. Can return `NOT_FOUND`, `INVALID_ARGUMENT`, and `PERMISSION_DENIED` errors.
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.alertPolicies.html b/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.alertPolicies.html
index f5cfdc7..f0f4255 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.alertPolicies.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.alertPolicies.html
@@ -112,6 +112,7 @@
 
 { # A description of the conditions under which some aspect of your system is considered to be &quot;unhealthy&quot; and the ways to notify people or services about this state. For an overview of alert policies, see Introduction to Alerting (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/alerts/).
   &quot;alertStrategy&quot;: { # Control over how the notification channels in notification_channels are notified when this alert fires. # Control over how this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels are notified.
+    &quot;autoClose&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If an alert policy that was active has no data for this log, any open incidents will close
     &quot;notificationRateLimit&quot;: { # Control over the rate of notifications sent to this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels. # Required for alert policies with a LogMatch condition.This limit is not implemented for alert policies that are not log-based.
       &quot;period&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Not more than one notification per period.
     },
@@ -138,8 +139,8 @@
         },
       },
       &quot;conditionMatchedLog&quot;: { # A condition type that checks whether a log message in the scoping project (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3#project_name) satisfies the given filter. Logs from other projects in the metrics scope are not evaluated. # A condition that checks for log messages matching given constraints. If set, no other conditions can be present.
-        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries for how this filter should be constructed.
-        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors for syntax and examples.
+        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) for how this filter should be constructed.
+        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/reference/v2/rest/v2/projects.metrics#LogMetric.FIELDS.value_extractor) for syntax and examples.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
       },
@@ -228,6 +229,7 @@
 
     { # A description of the conditions under which some aspect of your system is considered to be &quot;unhealthy&quot; and the ways to notify people or services about this state. For an overview of alert policies, see Introduction to Alerting (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/alerts/).
   &quot;alertStrategy&quot;: { # Control over how the notification channels in notification_channels are notified when this alert fires. # Control over how this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels are notified.
+    &quot;autoClose&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If an alert policy that was active has no data for this log, any open incidents will close
     &quot;notificationRateLimit&quot;: { # Control over the rate of notifications sent to this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels. # Required for alert policies with a LogMatch condition.This limit is not implemented for alert policies that are not log-based.
       &quot;period&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Not more than one notification per period.
     },
@@ -254,8 +256,8 @@
         },
       },
       &quot;conditionMatchedLog&quot;: { # A condition type that checks whether a log message in the scoping project (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3#project_name) satisfies the given filter. Logs from other projects in the metrics scope are not evaluated. # A condition that checks for log messages matching given constraints. If set, no other conditions can be present.
-        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries for how this filter should be constructed.
-        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors for syntax and examples.
+        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) for how this filter should be constructed.
+        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/reference/v2/rest/v2/projects.metrics#LogMetric.FIELDS.value_extractor) for syntax and examples.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
       },
@@ -369,6 +371,7 @@
 
     { # A description of the conditions under which some aspect of your system is considered to be &quot;unhealthy&quot; and the ways to notify people or services about this state. For an overview of alert policies, see Introduction to Alerting (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/alerts/).
   &quot;alertStrategy&quot;: { # Control over how the notification channels in notification_channels are notified when this alert fires. # Control over how this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels are notified.
+    &quot;autoClose&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If an alert policy that was active has no data for this log, any open incidents will close
     &quot;notificationRateLimit&quot;: { # Control over the rate of notifications sent to this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels. # Required for alert policies with a LogMatch condition.This limit is not implemented for alert policies that are not log-based.
       &quot;period&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Not more than one notification per period.
     },
@@ -395,8 +398,8 @@
         },
       },
       &quot;conditionMatchedLog&quot;: { # A condition type that checks whether a log message in the scoping project (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3#project_name) satisfies the given filter. Logs from other projects in the metrics scope are not evaluated. # A condition that checks for log messages matching given constraints. If set, no other conditions can be present.
-        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries for how this filter should be constructed.
-        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors for syntax and examples.
+        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) for how this filter should be constructed.
+        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/reference/v2/rest/v2/projects.metrics#LogMetric.FIELDS.value_extractor) for syntax and examples.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
       },
@@ -498,6 +501,7 @@
   &quot;alertPolicies&quot;: [ # The returned alert policies.
     { # A description of the conditions under which some aspect of your system is considered to be &quot;unhealthy&quot; and the ways to notify people or services about this state. For an overview of alert policies, see Introduction to Alerting (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/alerts/).
       &quot;alertStrategy&quot;: { # Control over how the notification channels in notification_channels are notified when this alert fires. # Control over how this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels are notified.
+        &quot;autoClose&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If an alert policy that was active has no data for this log, any open incidents will close
         &quot;notificationRateLimit&quot;: { # Control over the rate of notifications sent to this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels. # Required for alert policies with a LogMatch condition.This limit is not implemented for alert policies that are not log-based.
           &quot;period&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Not more than one notification per period.
         },
@@ -524,8 +528,8 @@
             },
           },
           &quot;conditionMatchedLog&quot;: { # A condition type that checks whether a log message in the scoping project (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3#project_name) satisfies the given filter. Logs from other projects in the metrics scope are not evaluated. # A condition that checks for log messages matching given constraints. If set, no other conditions can be present.
-            &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries for how this filter should be constructed.
-            &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors for syntax and examples.
+            &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) for how this filter should be constructed.
+            &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/reference/v2/rest/v2/projects.metrics#LogMetric.FIELDS.value_extractor) for syntax and examples.
               &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
             },
           },
@@ -634,6 +638,7 @@
 
 { # A description of the conditions under which some aspect of your system is considered to be &quot;unhealthy&quot; and the ways to notify people or services about this state. For an overview of alert policies, see Introduction to Alerting (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/alerts/).
   &quot;alertStrategy&quot;: { # Control over how the notification channels in notification_channels are notified when this alert fires. # Control over how this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels are notified.
+    &quot;autoClose&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If an alert policy that was active has no data for this log, any open incidents will close
     &quot;notificationRateLimit&quot;: { # Control over the rate of notifications sent to this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels. # Required for alert policies with a LogMatch condition.This limit is not implemented for alert policies that are not log-based.
       &quot;period&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Not more than one notification per period.
     },
@@ -660,8 +665,8 @@
         },
       },
       &quot;conditionMatchedLog&quot;: { # A condition type that checks whether a log message in the scoping project (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3#project_name) satisfies the given filter. Logs from other projects in the metrics scope are not evaluated. # A condition that checks for log messages matching given constraints. If set, no other conditions can be present.
-        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries for how this filter should be constructed.
-        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors for syntax and examples.
+        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) for how this filter should be constructed.
+        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/reference/v2/rest/v2/projects.metrics#LogMetric.FIELDS.value_extractor) for syntax and examples.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
       },
@@ -751,6 +756,7 @@
 
     { # A description of the conditions under which some aspect of your system is considered to be &quot;unhealthy&quot; and the ways to notify people or services about this state. For an overview of alert policies, see Introduction to Alerting (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/alerts/).
   &quot;alertStrategy&quot;: { # Control over how the notification channels in notification_channels are notified when this alert fires. # Control over how this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels are notified.
+    &quot;autoClose&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If an alert policy that was active has no data for this log, any open incidents will close
     &quot;notificationRateLimit&quot;: { # Control over the rate of notifications sent to this alert policy&#x27;s notification channels. # Required for alert policies with a LogMatch condition.This limit is not implemented for alert policies that are not log-based.
       &quot;period&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Not more than one notification per period.
     },
@@ -777,8 +783,8 @@
         },
       },
       &quot;conditionMatchedLog&quot;: { # A condition type that checks whether a log message in the scoping project (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3#project_name) satisfies the given filter. Logs from other projects in the metrics scope are not evaluated. # A condition that checks for log messages matching given constraints. If set, no other conditions can be present.
-        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries for how this filter should be constructed.
-        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors for syntax and examples.
+        &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Required. A logs-based filter. See Advanced Logs Queries (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/view/advanced-queries) for how this filter should be constructed.
+        &quot;labelExtractors&quot;: { # Optional. A map from a label key to an extractor expression, which is used to extract the value for this label key. Each entry in this map is a specification for how data should be extracted from log entries that match filter. Each combination of extracted values is treated as a separate rule for the purposes of triggering notifications. Label keys and corresponding values can be used in notifications generated by this condition.Please see the documentation on logs-based metric valueExtractors (https://cloud.google.com/logging/docs/reference/v2/rest/v2/projects.metrics#LogMetric.FIELDS.value_extractor) for syntax and examples.
           &quot;a_key&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;,
         },
       },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.metricDescriptors.html b/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.metricDescriptors.html
index a8ce17f..ad53616 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.metricDescriptors.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/monitoring_v3.projects.metricDescriptors.html
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@
 <p class="firstline">Close httplib2 connections.</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#create">create(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
-<p class="firstline">Creates a new metric descriptor. User-created metric descriptors define custom metrics (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/custom-metrics).</p>
+<p class="firstline">Creates a new metric descriptor. The creation is executed asynchronously and callers may check the returned operation to track its progress. User-created metric descriptors define custom metrics (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/custom-metrics).</p>
 <p class="toc_element">
   <code><a href="#delete">delete(name, x__xgafv=None)</a></code></p>
 <p class="firstline">Deletes a metric descriptor. Only user-created custom metrics (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/custom-metrics) can be deleted.</p>
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@
 
 <div class="method">
     <code class="details" id="create">create(name, body=None, x__xgafv=None)</code>
-  <pre>Creates a new metric descriptor. User-created metric descriptors define custom metrics (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/custom-metrics).
+  <pre>Creates a new metric descriptor. The creation is executed asynchronously and callers may check the returned operation to track its progress. User-created metric descriptors define custom metrics (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/custom-metrics).
 
 Args:
   name: string, Required. The project (https://cloud.google.com/monitoring/api/v3#project_name) on which to execute the request. The format is: 4 projects/PROJECT_ID_OR_NUMBER (required)
diff --git a/docs/dyn/people_v1.otherContacts.html b/docs/dyn/people_v1.otherContacts.html
index b09d238..5b129a6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/people_v1.otherContacts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/people_v1.otherContacts.html
@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
     { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
       &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
       &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
         &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
         { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
           &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
           &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
             &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -2244,7 +2244,7 @@
         ],
         &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
           { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
             &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
             &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
               &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/people_v1.people.connections.html b/docs/dyn/people_v1.people.connections.html
index aa21fee..3885840 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/people_v1.people.connections.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/people_v1.people.connections.html
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
         { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
           &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
           &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
             &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/people_v1.people.html b/docs/dyn/people_v1.people.html
index 0336b1c..7db5c28 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/people_v1.people.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/people_v1.people.html
@@ -439,7 +439,7 @@
         ],
         &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
           { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
             &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
             &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
               &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -1337,7 +1337,7 @@
         ],
         &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
           { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
             &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
             &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
               &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -2266,7 +2266,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
         { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
           &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
           &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
             &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -3164,7 +3164,7 @@
         ],
         &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
           { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
             &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
             &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
               &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -4070,7 +4070,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
     { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
       &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
       &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
         &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -4964,7 +4964,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
     { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
       &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
       &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
         &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -5884,7 +5884,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
       { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-        &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+        &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
         &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
         &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
           &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -6787,7 +6787,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
     { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
       &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
       &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
         &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -7693,7 +7693,7 @@
         ],
         &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
           { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
             &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
             &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
               &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -8617,7 +8617,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
         { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
           &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
           &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
             &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -9538,7 +9538,7 @@
         ],
         &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
           { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+            &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
             &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
             &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
               &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -10450,7 +10450,7 @@
       ],
       &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
         { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+          &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
           &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
           &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
             &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -11356,7 +11356,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
     { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
       &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
       &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
         &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -12251,7 +12251,7 @@
   ],
   &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
     { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+      &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
       &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
       &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
         &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
@@ -13157,7 +13157,7 @@
     ],
     &quot;genders&quot;: [ # The person&#x27;s genders. This field is a singleton for contact sources.
       { # A person&#x27;s gender.
-        &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of pronouns that should be used to address the person. The value can be custom or one of these predefined values: * `male` * `female` * `other`
+        &quot;addressMeAs&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Free form text field for pronouns that should be used to address the person. Common values are: * `he`/`him` * `she`/`her` * `they`/`them`
         &quot;formattedValue&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Output only. The value of the gender translated and formatted in the viewer&#x27;s account locale or the `Accept-Language` HTTP header locale. Unspecified or custom value are not localized.
         &quot;metadata&quot;: { # Metadata about a field. # Metadata about the gender.
           &quot;primary&quot;: True or False, # Output only. True if the field is the primary field for all sources in the person. Each person will have at most one field with `primary` set to true.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.deployments.devices.html b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.deployments.devices.html
index 0db05f7..b262867 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.deployments.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.deployments.devices.html
@@ -154,6 +154,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -289,6 +291,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -439,6 +443,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -586,6 +592,8 @@
       ],
       &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
         &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+        &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+        &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
       },
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
       &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.devices.html b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.devices.html
index 1afde95..915b5ef 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.devices.html
@@ -172,6 +172,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -307,6 +309,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -457,6 +461,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -617,6 +623,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -764,6 +772,8 @@
       ],
       &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
         &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+        &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+        &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
       },
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
       &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -960,6 +970,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -1096,6 +1108,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -1234,6 +1248,8 @@
     ],
     &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
       &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+      &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+      &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
     },
     &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
     &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -1396,6 +1412,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.nodes.devices.html b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.nodes.devices.html
index b08d522..855fbf1 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.nodes.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.customers.nodes.devices.html
@@ -154,6 +154,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -289,6 +291,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -439,6 +443,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -586,6 +592,8 @@
       ],
       &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
         &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+        &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+        &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
       },
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
       &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.deployments.devices.html b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.deployments.devices.html
index da87ec7..960e82e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.deployments.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.deployments.devices.html
@@ -183,6 +183,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -362,6 +364,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -498,6 +502,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -636,6 +642,8 @@
     ],
     &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
       &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+      &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+      &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
     },
     &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
     &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -798,6 +806,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.deployments.devices.html b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.deployments.devices.html
index 5a793d0..3b9db72 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.deployments.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.deployments.devices.html
@@ -154,6 +154,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -289,6 +291,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -439,6 +443,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -586,6 +592,8 @@
       ],
       &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
         &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+        &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+        &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
       },
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
       &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.devices.html b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.devices.html
index d63ba7d..d393b21 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.devices.html
@@ -172,6 +172,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -307,6 +309,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -457,6 +461,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -617,6 +623,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -764,6 +772,8 @@
       ],
       &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
         &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+        &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+        &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
       },
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
       &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -960,6 +970,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -1096,6 +1108,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -1234,6 +1248,8 @@
     ],
     &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
       &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+      &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+      &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
     },
     &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
     &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -1396,6 +1412,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.nodes.devices.html b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.nodes.devices.html
index b61d4c2..c5aa1e3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.nodes.devices.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/prod_tt_sasportal_v1alpha1.nodes.nodes.devices.html
@@ -154,6 +154,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -289,6 +291,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -439,6 +443,8 @@
   ],
   &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
     &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+    &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+    &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
   },
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
   &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
@@ -586,6 +592,8 @@
       ],
       &quot;deviceMetadata&quot;: { # Device data overridable by both SAS Portal and registration requests. # Device parameters that can be overridden by both SAS Portal and SAS registration requests.
         &quot;antennaModel&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If populated, the Antenna Model Pattern to use. Format is: RecordCreatorId:PatternId
+        &quot;commonChannelGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # CCG. A group of CBSDs in the same ICG requesting a common primary channel assignment. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
+        &quot;interferenceCoordinationGroup&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # ICG. A group of CBSDs that manage their own interference with the group. See CBRSA-TS-2001 V3.0.0 for more details.
       },
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Device display name.
       &quot;fccId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The FCC identifier of the device.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/pubsub_v1.projects.subscriptions.html b/docs/dyn/pubsub_v1.projects.subscriptions.html
index 224fa81..895dba3 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/pubsub_v1.projects.subscriptions.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/pubsub_v1.projects.subscriptions.html
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@
   },
   &quot;detached&quot;: True or False, # Indicates whether the subscription is detached from its topic. Detached subscriptions don&#x27;t receive messages from their topic and don&#x27;t retain any backlog. `Pull` and `StreamingPull` requests will return FAILED_PRECONDITION. If the subscription is a push subscription, pushes to the endpoint will not be made.
   &quot;enableMessageOrdering&quot;: True or False, # If true, messages published with the same `ordering_key` in `PubsubMessage` will be delivered to the subscribers in the order in which they are received by the Pub/Sub system. Otherwise, they may be delivered in any order.
-  &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day.
+  &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day. If `expiration_policy` is set, but `expiration_policy.ttl` is not set, the subscription never expires.
     &quot;ttl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the &quot;time-to-live&quot; duration for an associated resource. The resource expires if it is not active for a period of `ttl`. The definition of &quot;activity&quot; depends on the type of the associated resource. The minimum and maximum allowed values for `ttl` depend on the type of the associated resource, as well. If `ttl` is not set, the associated resource never expires.
   },
   &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression written in the Pub/Sub [filter language](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/filtering). If non-empty, then only `PubsubMessage`s whose `attributes` field matches the filter are delivered on this subscription. If empty, then no messages are filtered out.
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@
   },
   &quot;detached&quot;: True or False, # Indicates whether the subscription is detached from its topic. Detached subscriptions don&#x27;t receive messages from their topic and don&#x27;t retain any backlog. `Pull` and `StreamingPull` requests will return FAILED_PRECONDITION. If the subscription is a push subscription, pushes to the endpoint will not be made.
   &quot;enableMessageOrdering&quot;: True or False, # If true, messages published with the same `ordering_key` in `PubsubMessage` will be delivered to the subscribers in the order in which they are received by the Pub/Sub system. Otherwise, they may be delivered in any order.
-  &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day.
+  &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day. If `expiration_policy` is set, but `expiration_policy.ttl` is not set, the subscription never expires.
     &quot;ttl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the &quot;time-to-live&quot; duration for an associated resource. The resource expires if it is not active for a period of `ttl`. The definition of &quot;activity&quot; depends on the type of the associated resource. The minimum and maximum allowed values for `ttl` depend on the type of the associated resource, as well. If `ttl` is not set, the associated resource never expires.
   },
   &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression written in the Pub/Sub [filter language](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/filtering). If non-empty, then only `PubsubMessage`s whose `attributes` field matches the filter are delivered on this subscription. If empty, then no messages are filtered out.
@@ -303,7 +303,7 @@
   },
   &quot;detached&quot;: True or False, # Indicates whether the subscription is detached from its topic. Detached subscriptions don&#x27;t receive messages from their topic and don&#x27;t retain any backlog. `Pull` and `StreamingPull` requests will return FAILED_PRECONDITION. If the subscription is a push subscription, pushes to the endpoint will not be made.
   &quot;enableMessageOrdering&quot;: True or False, # If true, messages published with the same `ordering_key` in `PubsubMessage` will be delivered to the subscribers in the order in which they are received by the Pub/Sub system. Otherwise, they may be delivered in any order.
-  &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day.
+  &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day. If `expiration_policy` is set, but `expiration_policy.ttl` is not set, the subscription never expires.
     &quot;ttl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the &quot;time-to-live&quot; duration for an associated resource. The resource expires if it is not active for a period of `ttl`. The definition of &quot;activity&quot; depends on the type of the associated resource. The minimum and maximum allowed values for `ttl` depend on the type of the associated resource, as well. If `ttl` is not set, the associated resource never expires.
   },
   &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression written in the Pub/Sub [filter language](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/filtering). If non-empty, then only `PubsubMessage`s whose `attributes` field matches the filter are delivered on this subscription. If empty, then no messages are filtered out.
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@
       },
       &quot;detached&quot;: True or False, # Indicates whether the subscription is detached from its topic. Detached subscriptions don&#x27;t receive messages from their topic and don&#x27;t retain any backlog. `Pull` and `StreamingPull` requests will return FAILED_PRECONDITION. If the subscription is a push subscription, pushes to the endpoint will not be made.
       &quot;enableMessageOrdering&quot;: True or False, # If true, messages published with the same `ordering_key` in `PubsubMessage` will be delivered to the subscribers in the order in which they are received by the Pub/Sub system. Otherwise, they may be delivered in any order.
-      &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day.
+      &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day. If `expiration_policy` is set, but `expiration_policy.ttl` is not set, the subscription never expires.
         &quot;ttl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the &quot;time-to-live&quot; duration for an associated resource. The resource expires if it is not active for a period of `ttl`. The definition of &quot;activity&quot; depends on the type of the associated resource. The minimum and maximum allowed values for `ttl` depend on the type of the associated resource, as well. If `ttl` is not set, the associated resource never expires.
       },
       &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression written in the Pub/Sub [filter language](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/filtering). If non-empty, then only `PubsubMessage`s whose `attributes` field matches the filter are delivered on this subscription. If empty, then no messages are filtered out.
@@ -519,7 +519,7 @@
     },
     &quot;detached&quot;: True or False, # Indicates whether the subscription is detached from its topic. Detached subscriptions don&#x27;t receive messages from their topic and don&#x27;t retain any backlog. `Pull` and `StreamingPull` requests will return FAILED_PRECONDITION. If the subscription is a push subscription, pushes to the endpoint will not be made.
     &quot;enableMessageOrdering&quot;: True or False, # If true, messages published with the same `ordering_key` in `PubsubMessage` will be delivered to the subscribers in the order in which they are received by the Pub/Sub system. Otherwise, they may be delivered in any order.
-    &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day.
+    &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day. If `expiration_policy` is set, but `expiration_policy.ttl` is not set, the subscription never expires.
       &quot;ttl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the &quot;time-to-live&quot; duration for an associated resource. The resource expires if it is not active for a period of `ttl`. The definition of &quot;activity&quot; depends on the type of the associated resource. The minimum and maximum allowed values for `ttl` depend on the type of the associated resource, as well. If `ttl` is not set, the associated resource never expires.
     },
     &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression written in the Pub/Sub [filter language](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/filtering). If non-empty, then only `PubsubMessage`s whose `attributes` field matches the filter are delivered on this subscription. If empty, then no messages are filtered out.
@@ -565,7 +565,7 @@
   },
   &quot;detached&quot;: True or False, # Indicates whether the subscription is detached from its topic. Detached subscriptions don&#x27;t receive messages from their topic and don&#x27;t retain any backlog. `Pull` and `StreamingPull` requests will return FAILED_PRECONDITION. If the subscription is a push subscription, pushes to the endpoint will not be made.
   &quot;enableMessageOrdering&quot;: True or False, # If true, messages published with the same `ordering_key` in `PubsubMessage` will be delivered to the subscribers in the order in which they are received by the Pub/Sub system. Otherwise, they may be delivered in any order.
-  &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day.
+  &quot;expirationPolicy&quot;: { # A policy that specifies the conditions for resource expiration (i.e., automatic resource deletion). # A policy that specifies the conditions for this subscription&#x27;s expiration. A subscription is considered active as long as any connected subscriber is successfully consuming messages from the subscription or is issuing operations on the subscription. If `expiration_policy` is not set, a *default policy* with `ttl` of 31 days will be used. The minimum allowed value for `expiration_policy.ttl` is 1 day. If `expiration_policy` is set, but `expiration_policy.ttl` is not set, the subscription never expires.
     &quot;ttl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the &quot;time-to-live&quot; duration for an associated resource. The resource expires if it is not active for a period of `ttl`. The definition of &quot;activity&quot; depends on the type of the associated resource. The minimum and maximum allowed values for `ttl` depend on the type of the associated resource, as well. If `ttl` is not set, the associated resource never expires.
   },
   &quot;filter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An expression written in the Pub/Sub [filter language](https://cloud.google.com/pubsub/docs/filtering). If non-empty, then only `PubsubMessage`s whose `attributes` field matches the filter are delivered on this subscription. If empty, then no messages are filtered out.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/recaptchaenterprise_v1.projects.keys.html b/docs/dyn/recaptchaenterprise_v1.projects.keys.html
index cc266c6..c6ef2a9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/recaptchaenterprise_v1.projects.keys.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/recaptchaenterprise_v1.projects.keys.html
@@ -118,6 +118,7 @@
 
 { # A key used to identify and configure applications (web and/or mobile) that use reCAPTCHA Enterprise.
   &quot;androidSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by Android apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by Android apps.
+    &quot;allowAllPackageNames&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_package_names will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedPackageNames&quot;: [ # Android package names of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -125,6 +126,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The timestamp corresponding to the creation of this Key.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Human-readable display name of this key. Modifiable by user.
   &quot;iosSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by iOS apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by iOS apps.
+    &quot;allowAllBundleIds&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_bundle_ids will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedBundleIds&quot;: [ # iOS bundle ids of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.productname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -158,6 +160,7 @@
 
     { # A key used to identify and configure applications (web and/or mobile) that use reCAPTCHA Enterprise.
   &quot;androidSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by Android apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by Android apps.
+    &quot;allowAllPackageNames&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_package_names will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedPackageNames&quot;: [ # Android package names of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -165,6 +168,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The timestamp corresponding to the creation of this Key.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Human-readable display name of this key. Modifiable by user.
   &quot;iosSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by iOS apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by iOS apps.
+    &quot;allowAllBundleIds&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_bundle_ids will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedBundleIds&quot;: [ # iOS bundle ids of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.productname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -223,6 +227,7 @@
 
     { # A key used to identify and configure applications (web and/or mobile) that use reCAPTCHA Enterprise.
   &quot;androidSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by Android apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by Android apps.
+    &quot;allowAllPackageNames&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_package_names will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedPackageNames&quot;: [ # Android package names of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -230,6 +235,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The timestamp corresponding to the creation of this Key.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Human-readable display name of this key. Modifiable by user.
   &quot;iosSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by iOS apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by iOS apps.
+    &quot;allowAllBundleIds&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_bundle_ids will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedBundleIds&quot;: [ # iOS bundle ids of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.productname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -318,6 +324,7 @@
   &quot;keys&quot;: [ # Key details.
     { # A key used to identify and configure applications (web and/or mobile) that use reCAPTCHA Enterprise.
       &quot;androidSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by Android apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by Android apps.
+        &quot;allowAllPackageNames&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_package_names will not be enforced.
         &quot;allowedPackageNames&quot;: [ # Android package names of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.appname&#x27;
           &quot;A String&quot;,
         ],
@@ -325,6 +332,7 @@
       &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The timestamp corresponding to the creation of this Key.
       &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Human-readable display name of this key. Modifiable by user.
       &quot;iosSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by iOS apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by iOS apps.
+        &quot;allowAllBundleIds&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_bundle_ids will not be enforced.
         &quot;allowedBundleIds&quot;: [ # iOS bundle ids of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.productname.appname&#x27;
           &quot;A String&quot;,
         ],
@@ -388,6 +396,7 @@
 
     { # A key used to identify and configure applications (web and/or mobile) that use reCAPTCHA Enterprise.
   &quot;androidSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by Android apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by Android apps.
+    &quot;allowAllPackageNames&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_package_names will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedPackageNames&quot;: [ # Android package names of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -395,6 +404,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The timestamp corresponding to the creation of this Key.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Human-readable display name of this key. Modifiable by user.
   &quot;iosSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by iOS apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by iOS apps.
+    &quot;allowAllBundleIds&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_bundle_ids will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedBundleIds&quot;: [ # iOS bundle ids of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.productname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -430,6 +440,7 @@
 
 { # A key used to identify and configure applications (web and/or mobile) that use reCAPTCHA Enterprise.
   &quot;androidSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by Android apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by Android apps.
+    &quot;allowAllPackageNames&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_package_names will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedPackageNames&quot;: [ # Android package names of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -437,6 +448,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The timestamp corresponding to the creation of this Key.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Human-readable display name of this key. Modifiable by user.
   &quot;iosSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by iOS apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by iOS apps.
+    &quot;allowAllBundleIds&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_bundle_ids will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedBundleIds&quot;: [ # iOS bundle ids of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.productname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -471,6 +483,7 @@
 
     { # A key used to identify and configure applications (web and/or mobile) that use reCAPTCHA Enterprise.
   &quot;androidSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by Android apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by Android apps.
+    &quot;allowAllPackageNames&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_package_names will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedPackageNames&quot;: [ # Android package names of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
@@ -478,6 +491,7 @@
   &quot;createTime&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The timestamp corresponding to the creation of this Key.
   &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Human-readable display name of this key. Modifiable by user.
   &quot;iosSettings&quot;: { # Settings specific to keys that can be used by iOS apps. # Settings for keys that can be used by iOS apps.
+    &quot;allowAllBundleIds&quot;: True or False, # If set to true, it means allowed_bundle_ids will not be enforced.
     &quot;allowedBundleIds&quot;: [ # iOS bundle ids of apps allowed to use the key. Example: &#x27;com.companyname.productname.appname&#x27;
       &quot;A String&quot;,
     ],
diff --git a/docs/dyn/searchconsole_v1.sitemaps.html b/docs/dyn/searchconsole_v1.sitemaps.html
index 201f45d..0cac33f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/searchconsole_v1.sitemaps.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/searchconsole_v1.sitemaps.html
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@
     { # Contains detailed information about a specific URL submitted as a [sitemap](https://support.google.com/webmasters/answer/156184).
   &quot;contents&quot;: [ # The various content types in the sitemap.
     { # Information about the various content types in the sitemap.
-      &quot;indexed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of URLs from the sitemap that were indexed (of the content type).
+      &quot;indexed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # *Deprecated; do not use.*
       &quot;submitted&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of URLs in the sitemap (of the content type).
       &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The specific type of content in this sitemap. For example: `web`.
     },
@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@
     { # Contains detailed information about a specific URL submitted as a [sitemap](https://support.google.com/webmasters/answer/156184).
       &quot;contents&quot;: [ # The various content types in the sitemap.
         { # Information about the various content types in the sitemap.
-          &quot;indexed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of URLs from the sitemap that were indexed (of the content type).
+          &quot;indexed&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # *Deprecated; do not use.*
           &quot;submitted&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The number of URLs in the sitemap (of the content type).
           &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The specific type of content in this sitemap. For example: `web`.
         },
diff --git a/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html b/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html
index bee6c9e..1eaf511 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.html
@@ -777,7 +777,1014 @@
           &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
           &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
           &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-          &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
+          &quot;notesPage&quot;: { # A page in a presentation. # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
+            &quot;layoutProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page are only relevant for pages with page_type LAYOUT. # Layout specific properties. Only set if page_type = LAYOUT.
+              &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The human-readable name of the layout.
+              &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this layout is based on.
+              &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the layout.
+            },
+            &quot;masterProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type MASTER. # Master specific properties. Only set if page_type = MASTER.
+              &quot;displayName&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The human-readable name of the master.
+            },
+            &quot;notesProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type NOTES. # Notes specific properties. Only set if page_type = NOTES.
+              &quot;speakerNotesObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the shape on this notes page that contains the speaker notes for the corresponding slide. The actual shape may not always exist on the notes page. Inserting text using this object ID will automatically create the shape. In this case, the actual shape may have different object ID. The `GetPresentation` or `GetPage` action will always return the latest object ID.
+            },
+            &quot;objectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID for this page. Object IDs used by Page and PageElement share the same namespace.
+            &quot;pageElements&quot;: [ # The page elements rendered on the page.
+              { # A visual element rendered on a page.
+                &quot;description&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The description of the page element. Combined with title to display alt text. The field is not supported for Group elements.
+                &quot;elementGroup&quot;: { # A PageElement kind representing a joined collection of PageElements. # A collection of page elements joined as a single unit.
+                  &quot;children&quot;: [ # The collection of elements in the group. The minimum size of a group is 2.
+                    # Object with schema name: PageElement
+                  ],
+                },
+                &quot;image&quot;: { # A PageElement kind representing an image. # An image page element.
+                  &quot;contentUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An URL to an image with a default lifetime of 30 minutes. This URL is tagged with the account of the requester. Anyone with the URL effectively accesses the image as the original requester. Access to the image may be lost if the presentation&#x27;s sharing settings change.
+                  &quot;imageProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the Image. # The properties of the image.
+                    &quot;brightness&quot;: 3.14, # The brightness effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [-1.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect. This property is read-only.
+                    &quot;contrast&quot;: 3.14, # The contrast effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [-1.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect. This property is read-only.
+                    &quot;cropProperties&quot;: { # The crop properties of an object enclosed in a container. For example, an Image. The crop properties is represented by the offsets of four edges which define a crop rectangle. The offsets are measured in percentage from the corresponding edges of the object&#x27;s original bounding rectangle towards inside, relative to the object&#x27;s original dimensions. - If the offset is in the interval (0, 1), the corresponding edge of crop rectangle is positioned inside of the object&#x27;s original bounding rectangle. - If the offset is negative or greater than 1, the corresponding edge of crop rectangle is positioned outside of the object&#x27;s original bounding rectangle. - If the left edge of the crop rectangle is on the right side of its right edge, the object will be flipped horizontally. - If the top edge of the crop rectangle is below its bottom edge, the object will be flipped vertically. - If all offsets and rotation angle is 0, the object is not cropped. After cropping, the content in the crop rectangle will be stretched to fit its container. # The crop properties of the image. If not set, the image is not cropped. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;angle&quot;: 3.14, # The rotation angle of the crop window around its center, in radians. Rotation angle is applied after the offset.
+                      &quot;bottomOffset&quot;: 3.14, # The offset specifies the bottom edge of the crop rectangle that is located above the original bounding rectangle bottom edge, relative to the object&#x27;s original height.
+                      &quot;leftOffset&quot;: 3.14, # The offset specifies the left edge of the crop rectangle that is located to the right of the original bounding rectangle left edge, relative to the object&#x27;s original width.
+                      &quot;rightOffset&quot;: 3.14, # The offset specifies the right edge of the crop rectangle that is located to the left of the original bounding rectangle right edge, relative to the object&#x27;s original width.
+                      &quot;topOffset&quot;: 3.14, # The offset specifies the top edge of the crop rectangle that is located below the original bounding rectangle top edge, relative to the object&#x27;s original height.
+                    },
+                    &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the image. If unset, there is no link.
+                      &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                      &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                      &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                      &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                    },
+                    &quot;outline&quot;: { # The outline of a PageElement. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The outline of the image. If not set, the image has no outline.
+                      &quot;dashStyle&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The dash style of the outline.
+                      &quot;outlineFill&quot;: { # The fill of the outline. # The fill of the outline.
+                        &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                          &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                          &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                            &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                              &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            },
+                            &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                      &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The outline property state. Updating the outline on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no outline on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other outline fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      &quot;weight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the outline.
+                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    &quot;recolor&quot;: { # A recolor effect applied on an image. # The recolor effect of the image. If not set, the image is not recolored. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the recolor effect. The name is determined from the `recolor_stops` by matching the gradient against the colors in the page&#x27;s current color scheme. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;recolorStops&quot;: [ # The recolor effect is represented by a gradient, which is a list of color stops. The colors in the gradient will replace the corresponding colors at the same position in the color palette and apply to the image. This property is read-only.
+                        { # A color and position in a gradient band.
+                          &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The alpha value of this color in the gradient band. Defaults to 1.0, fully opaque.
+                          &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color of the gradient stop.
+                            &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                              &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            },
+                            &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                          },
+                          &quot;position&quot;: 3.14, # The relative position of the color stop in the gradient band measured in percentage. The value should be in the interval [0.0, 1.0].
+                        },
+                      ],
+                    },
+                    &quot;shadow&quot;: { # The shadow properties of a page element. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The shadow of the image. If not set, the image has no shadow. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;alignment&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alignment point of the shadow, that sets the origin for translate, scale and skew of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The alpha of the shadow&#x27;s color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      &quot;blurRadius&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The radius of the shadow blur. The larger the radius, the more diffuse the shadow becomes.
+                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                      &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The shadow color value.
+                        &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                          &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                        },
+                        &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                      },
+                      &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The shadow property state. Updating the shadow on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no shadow on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other shadow fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      &quot;rotateWithShape&quot;: True or False, # Whether the shadow should rotate with the shape. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;transform&quot;: { # AffineTransform uses a 3x3 matrix with an implied last row of [ 0 0 1 ] to transform source coordinates (x,y) into destination coordinates (x&#x27;, y&#x27;) according to: x&#x27; x = shear_y scale_y translate_y 1 [ 1 ] After transformation, x&#x27; = scale_x * x + shear_x * y + translate_x; y&#x27; = scale_y * y + shear_y * x + translate_y; This message is therefore composed of these six matrix elements. # Transform that encodes the translate, scale, and skew of the shadow, relative to the alignment position.
+                        &quot;scaleX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate scaling element.
+                        &quot;scaleY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate scaling element.
+                        &quot;shearX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate shearing element.
+                        &quot;shearY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate shearing element.
+                        &quot;translateX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate translation element.
+                        &quot;translateY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate translation element.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for translate elements.
+                      },
+                      &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                    },
+                    &quot;transparency&quot;: 3.14, # The transparency effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [0.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect and 1 means completely transparent. This property is read-only.
+                  },
+                  &quot;placeholder&quot;: { # The placeholder information that uniquely identifies a placeholder shape. # Placeholders are page elements that inherit from corresponding placeholders on layouts and masters. If set, the image is a placeholder image and any inherited properties can be resolved by looking at the parent placeholder identified by the Placeholder.parent_object_id field.
+                    &quot;index&quot;: 42, # The index of the placeholder. If the same placeholder types are present in the same page, they would have different index values.
+                    &quot;parentObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of this shape&#x27;s parent placeholder. If unset, the parent placeholder shape does not exist, so the shape does not inherit properties from any other shape.
+                    &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the placeholder.
+                  },
+                  &quot;sourceUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The source URL is the URL used to insert the image. The source URL can be empty.
+                },
+                &quot;line&quot;: { # A PageElement kind representing a non-connector line, straight connector, curved connector, or bent connector. # A line page element.
+                  &quot;lineCategory&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The category of the line. It matches the `category` specified in CreateLineRequest, and can be updated with UpdateLineCategoryRequest.
+                  &quot;lineProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the Line. When unset, these fields default to values that match the appearance of new lines created in the Slides editor. # The properties of the line.
+                    &quot;dashStyle&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The dash style of the line.
+                    &quot;endArrow&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The style of the arrow at the end of the line.
+                    &quot;endConnection&quot;: { # The properties for one end of a Line connection. # The connection at the end of the line. If unset, there is no connection. Only lines with a Type indicating it is a &quot;connector&quot; can have an `end_connection`.
+                      &quot;connectedObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the connected page element. Some page elements, such as groups, tables, and lines do not have connection sites and therefore cannot be connected to a connector line.
+                      &quot;connectionSiteIndex&quot;: 42, # The index of the connection site on the connected page element. In most cases, it corresponds to the predefined connection site index from the ECMA-376 standard. More information on those connection sites can be found in the description of the &quot;cnx&quot; attribute in section 20.1.9.9 and Annex H. &quot;Predefined DrawingML Shape and Text Geometries&quot; of &quot;Office Open XML File Formats-Fundamentals and Markup Language Reference&quot;, part 1 of [ECMA-376 5th edition] (http://www.ecma-international.org/publications/standards/Ecma-376.htm). The position of each connection site can also be viewed from Slides editor.
+                    },
+                    &quot;lineFill&quot;: { # The fill of the line. # The fill of the line. The default line fill matches the defaults for new lines created in the Slides editor.
+                      &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                        &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                        &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                          &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                            &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          },
+                          &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                    &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the line. If unset, there is no link.
+                      &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                      &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                      &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                      &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                    },
+                    &quot;startArrow&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The style of the arrow at the beginning of the line.
+                    &quot;startConnection&quot;: { # The properties for one end of a Line connection. # The connection at the beginning of the line. If unset, there is no connection. Only lines with a Type indicating it is a &quot;connector&quot; can have a `start_connection`.
+                      &quot;connectedObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the connected page element. Some page elements, such as groups, tables, and lines do not have connection sites and therefore cannot be connected to a connector line.
+                      &quot;connectionSiteIndex&quot;: 42, # The index of the connection site on the connected page element. In most cases, it corresponds to the predefined connection site index from the ECMA-376 standard. More information on those connection sites can be found in the description of the &quot;cnx&quot; attribute in section 20.1.9.9 and Annex H. &quot;Predefined DrawingML Shape and Text Geometries&quot; of &quot;Office Open XML File Formats-Fundamentals and Markup Language Reference&quot;, part 1 of [ECMA-376 5th edition] (http://www.ecma-international.org/publications/standards/Ecma-376.htm). The position of each connection site can also be viewed from Slides editor.
+                    },
+                    &quot;weight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the line.
+                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;lineType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the line.
+                },
+                &quot;objectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID for this page element. Object IDs used by google.apps.slides.v1.Page and google.apps.slides.v1.PageElement share the same namespace.
+                &quot;shape&quot;: { # A PageElement kind representing a generic shape that does not have a more specific classification. # A generic shape.
+                  &quot;placeholder&quot;: { # The placeholder information that uniquely identifies a placeholder shape. # Placeholders are page elements that inherit from corresponding placeholders on layouts and masters. If set, the shape is a placeholder shape and any inherited properties can be resolved by looking at the parent placeholder identified by the Placeholder.parent_object_id field.
+                    &quot;index&quot;: 42, # The index of the placeholder. If the same placeholder types are present in the same page, they would have different index values.
+                    &quot;parentObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of this shape&#x27;s parent placeholder. If unset, the parent placeholder shape does not exist, so the shape does not inherit properties from any other shape.
+                    &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the placeholder.
+                  },
+                  &quot;shapeProperties&quot;: { # The properties of a Shape. If the shape is a placeholder shape as determined by the placeholder field, then these properties may be inherited from a parent placeholder shape. Determining the rendered value of the property depends on the corresponding property_state field value. Any text autofit settings on the shape are automatically deactivated by requests that can impact how text fits in the shape. # The properties of the shape.
+                    &quot;autofit&quot;: { # The autofit properties of a Shape. # The autofit properties of the shape. This property is only set for shapes that allow text.
+                      &quot;autofitType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The autofit type of the shape. If the autofit type is AUTOFIT_TYPE_UNSPECIFIED, the autofit type is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. The field is automatically set to NONE if a request is made that might affect text fitting within its bounding text box. In this case the font_scale is applied to the font_size and the line_spacing_reduction is applied to the line_spacing. Both properties are also reset to default values.
+                      &quot;fontScale&quot;: 3.14, # The font scale applied to the shape. For shapes with autofit_type NONE or SHAPE_AUTOFIT, this value is the default value of 1. For TEXT_AUTOFIT, this value multiplied by the font_size gives the font size that is rendered in the editor. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;lineSpacingReduction&quot;: 3.14, # The line spacing reduction applied to the shape. For shapes with autofit_type NONE or SHAPE_AUTOFIT, this value is the default value of 0. For TEXT_AUTOFIT, this value subtracted from the line_spacing gives the line spacing that is rendered in the editor. This property is read-only.
+                    },
+                    &quot;contentAlignment&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alignment of the content in the shape. If unspecified, the alignment is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If the shape has no parent, the default alignment matches the alignment for new shapes created in the Slides editor.
+                    &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the shape. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent placeholders.
+                      &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                      &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                      &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                      &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                    },
+                    &quot;outline&quot;: { # The outline of a PageElement. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The outline of the shape. If unset, the outline is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If the shape has no parent, then the default outline depends on the shape type, matching the defaults for new shapes created in the Slides editor.
+                      &quot;dashStyle&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The dash style of the outline.
+                      &quot;outlineFill&quot;: { # The fill of the outline. # The fill of the outline.
+                        &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                          &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                          &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                            &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                              &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            },
+                            &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                      &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The outline property state. Updating the outline on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no outline on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other outline fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      &quot;weight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the outline.
+                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    &quot;shadow&quot;: { # The shadow properties of a page element. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The shadow properties of the shape. If unset, the shadow is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If the shape has no parent, then the default shadow matches the defaults for new shapes created in the Slides editor. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;alignment&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alignment point of the shadow, that sets the origin for translate, scale and skew of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The alpha of the shadow&#x27;s color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      &quot;blurRadius&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The radius of the shadow blur. The larger the radius, the more diffuse the shadow becomes.
+                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                      &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The shadow color value.
+                        &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                          &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                        },
+                        &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                      },
+                      &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The shadow property state. Updating the shadow on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no shadow on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other shadow fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      &quot;rotateWithShape&quot;: True or False, # Whether the shadow should rotate with the shape. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;transform&quot;: { # AffineTransform uses a 3x3 matrix with an implied last row of [ 0 0 1 ] to transform source coordinates (x,y) into destination coordinates (x&#x27;, y&#x27;) according to: x&#x27; x = shear_y scale_y translate_y 1 [ 1 ] After transformation, x&#x27; = scale_x * x + shear_x * y + translate_x; y&#x27; = scale_y * y + shear_y * x + translate_y; This message is therefore composed of these six matrix elements. # Transform that encodes the translate, scale, and skew of the shadow, relative to the alignment position.
+                        &quot;scaleX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate scaling element.
+                        &quot;scaleY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate scaling element.
+                        &quot;shearX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate shearing element.
+                        &quot;shearY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate shearing element.
+                        &quot;translateX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate translation element.
+                        &quot;translateY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate translation element.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for translate elements.
+                      },
+                      &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                    },
+                    &quot;shapeBackgroundFill&quot;: { # The shape background fill. # The background fill of the shape. If unset, the background fill is inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If the shape has no parent, then the default background fill depends on the shape type, matching the defaults for new shapes created in the Slides editor.
+                      &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The background fill property state. Updating the fill on a shape will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no fill on a shape, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other fill fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                        &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                        &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                          &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                            &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          },
+                          &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;shapeType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the shape.
+                  &quot;text&quot;: { # The general text content. The text must reside in a compatible shape (e.g. text box or rectangle) or a table cell in a page. # The text content of the shape.
+                    &quot;lists&quot;: { # The bulleted lists contained in this text, keyed by list ID.
+                      &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A List describes the look and feel of bullets belonging to paragraphs associated with a list. A paragraph that is part of a list has an implicit reference to that list&#x27;s ID.
+                        &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the list.
+                        &quot;nestingLevel&quot;: { # A map of nesting levels to the properties of bullets at the associated level. A list has at most nine levels of nesting, so the possible values for the keys of this map are 0 through 8, inclusive.
+                          &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains properties describing the look and feel of a list bullet at a given level of nesting.
+                            &quot;bulletStyle&quot;: { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The style of a bullet at this level of nesting.
+                              &quot;backgroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                  &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                              &quot;baselineOffset&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text&#x27;s vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                              &quot;bold&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                              &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                              &quot;fontSize&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text&#x27;s font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                              },
+                              &quot;foregroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                  &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                              &quot;italic&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                              &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `&quot;ABC\n123&quot;`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                              },
+                              &quot;smallCaps&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                              &quot;strikethrough&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                              &quot;underline&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                              &quot;weightedFontFamily&quot;: { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `&quot;*&quot;`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` (&quot;normal&quot;). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                &quot;weight&quot;: 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` (&quot;normal&quot;).
+                              },
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                    &quot;textElements&quot;: [ # The text contents broken down into its component parts, including styling information. This property is read-only.
+                      { # A TextElement describes the content of a range of indices in the text content of a Shape or TableCell.
+                        &quot;autoText&quot;: { # A TextElement kind that represents auto text. # A TextElement representing a spot in the text that is dynamically replaced with content that can change over time.
+                          &quot;content&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The rendered content of this auto text, if available.
+                          &quot;style&quot;: { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The styling applied to this auto text.
+                            &quot;backgroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                              &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                  &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                },
+                                &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                              },
+                            },
+                            &quot;baselineOffset&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text&#x27;s vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                            &quot;bold&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                            &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                            &quot;fontSize&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text&#x27;s font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            &quot;foregroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                              &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                  &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                },
+                                &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                              },
+                            },
+                            &quot;italic&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                            &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `&quot;ABC\n123&quot;`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                              &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                              &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                              &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                              &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                            },
+                            &quot;smallCaps&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                            &quot;strikethrough&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                            &quot;underline&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                            &quot;weightedFontFamily&quot;: { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `&quot;*&quot;`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` (&quot;normal&quot;). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                              &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                              &quot;weight&quot;: 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` (&quot;normal&quot;).
+                            },
+                          },
+                          &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of this auto text.
+                        },
+                        &quot;endIndex&quot;: 42, # The zero-based end index of this text element, exclusive, in Unicode code units.
+                        &quot;paragraphMarker&quot;: { # A TextElement kind that represents the beginning of a new paragraph. # A marker representing the beginning of a new paragraph. The `start_index` and `end_index` of this TextElement represent the range of the paragraph. Other TextElements with an index range contained inside this paragraph&#x27;s range are considered to be part of this paragraph. The range of indices of two separate paragraphs will never overlap.
+                          &quot;bullet&quot;: { # Describes the bullet of a paragraph. # The bullet for this paragraph. If not present, the paragraph does not belong to a list.
+                            &quot;bulletStyle&quot;: { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The paragraph specific text style applied to this bullet.
+                              &quot;backgroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                  &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                              &quot;baselineOffset&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text&#x27;s vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                              &quot;bold&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                              &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                              &quot;fontSize&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text&#x27;s font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                              },
+                              &quot;foregroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                  &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                              &quot;italic&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                              &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `&quot;ABC\n123&quot;`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                              },
+                              &quot;smallCaps&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                              &quot;strikethrough&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                              &quot;underline&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                              &quot;weightedFontFamily&quot;: { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `&quot;*&quot;`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` (&quot;normal&quot;). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                &quot;weight&quot;: 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` (&quot;normal&quot;).
+                              },
+                            },
+                            &quot;glyph&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The rendered bullet glyph for this paragraph.
+                            &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the list this paragraph belongs to.
+                            &quot;nestingLevel&quot;: 42, # The nesting level of this paragraph in the list.
+                          },
+                          &quot;style&quot;: { # Styles that apply to a whole paragraph. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these paragraph styles may be inherited from the parent. Which paragraph styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A paragraph not in a list will inherit its paragraph style from the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A paragraph in a list will inherit its paragraph style from the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited paragraph styles are represented as unset fields in this message. # The paragraph&#x27;s style
+                            &quot;alignment&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text alignment for this paragraph.
+                            &quot;direction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text direction of this paragraph. If unset, the value defaults to LEFT_TO_RIGHT since text direction is not inherited.
+                            &quot;indentEnd&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount indentation for the paragraph on the side that corresponds to the end of the text, based on the current text direction. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            &quot;indentFirstLine&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of indentation for the start of the first line of the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            &quot;indentStart&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount indentation for the paragraph on the side that corresponds to the start of the text, based on the current text direction. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            &quot;lineSpacing&quot;: 3.14, # The amount of space between lines, as a percentage of normal, where normal is represented as 100.0. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                            &quot;spaceAbove&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of extra space above the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            &quot;spaceBelow&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of extra space below the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            &quot;spacingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The spacing mode for the paragraph.
+                          },
+                        },
+                        &quot;startIndex&quot;: 42, # The zero-based start index of this text element, in Unicode code units.
+                        &quot;textRun&quot;: { # A TextElement kind that represents a run of text that all has the same styling. # A TextElement representing a run of text where all of the characters in the run have the same TextStyle. The `start_index` and `end_index` of TextRuns will always be fully contained in the index range of a single `paragraph_marker` TextElement. In other words, a TextRun will never span multiple paragraphs.
+                          &quot;content&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text of this run.
+                          &quot;style&quot;: { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The styling applied to this run.
+                            &quot;backgroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                              &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                  &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                },
+                                &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                              },
+                            },
+                            &quot;baselineOffset&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text&#x27;s vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                            &quot;bold&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                            &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                            &quot;fontSize&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text&#x27;s font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                            &quot;foregroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                              &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                  &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                },
+                                &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                              },
+                            },
+                            &quot;italic&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                            &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `&quot;ABC\n123&quot;`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                              &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                              &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                              &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                              &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                            },
+                            &quot;smallCaps&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                            &quot;strikethrough&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                            &quot;underline&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                            &quot;weightedFontFamily&quot;: { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `&quot;*&quot;`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` (&quot;normal&quot;). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                              &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                              &quot;weight&quot;: 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` (&quot;normal&quot;).
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                    ],
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;sheetsChart&quot;: { # A PageElement kind representing a linked chart embedded from Google Sheets. # A linked chart embedded from Google Sheets. Unlinked charts are represented as images.
+                  &quot;chartId&quot;: 42, # The ID of the specific chart in the Google Sheets spreadsheet that is embedded.
+                  &quot;contentUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The URL of an image of the embedded chart, with a default lifetime of 30 minutes. This URL is tagged with the account of the requester. Anyone with the URL effectively accesses the image as the original requester. Access to the image may be lost if the presentation&#x27;s sharing settings change.
+                  &quot;sheetsChartProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the SheetsChart. # The properties of the Sheets chart.
+                    &quot;chartImageProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the Image. # The properties of the embedded chart image.
+                      &quot;brightness&quot;: 3.14, # The brightness effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [-1.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;contrast&quot;: 3.14, # The contrast effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [-1.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect. This property is read-only.
+                      &quot;cropProperties&quot;: { # The crop properties of an object enclosed in a container. For example, an Image. The crop properties is represented by the offsets of four edges which define a crop rectangle. The offsets are measured in percentage from the corresponding edges of the object&#x27;s original bounding rectangle towards inside, relative to the object&#x27;s original dimensions. - If the offset is in the interval (0, 1), the corresponding edge of crop rectangle is positioned inside of the object&#x27;s original bounding rectangle. - If the offset is negative or greater than 1, the corresponding edge of crop rectangle is positioned outside of the object&#x27;s original bounding rectangle. - If the left edge of the crop rectangle is on the right side of its right edge, the object will be flipped horizontally. - If the top edge of the crop rectangle is below its bottom edge, the object will be flipped vertically. - If all offsets and rotation angle is 0, the object is not cropped. After cropping, the content in the crop rectangle will be stretched to fit its container. # The crop properties of the image. If not set, the image is not cropped. This property is read-only.
+                        &quot;angle&quot;: 3.14, # The rotation angle of the crop window around its center, in radians. Rotation angle is applied after the offset.
+                        &quot;bottomOffset&quot;: 3.14, # The offset specifies the bottom edge of the crop rectangle that is located above the original bounding rectangle bottom edge, relative to the object&#x27;s original height.
+                        &quot;leftOffset&quot;: 3.14, # The offset specifies the left edge of the crop rectangle that is located to the right of the original bounding rectangle left edge, relative to the object&#x27;s original width.
+                        &quot;rightOffset&quot;: 3.14, # The offset specifies the right edge of the crop rectangle that is located to the left of the original bounding rectangle right edge, relative to the object&#x27;s original width.
+                        &quot;topOffset&quot;: 3.14, # The offset specifies the top edge of the crop rectangle that is located below the original bounding rectangle top edge, relative to the object&#x27;s original height.
+                      },
+                      &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the image. If unset, there is no link.
+                        &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                        &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                        &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                        &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                      },
+                      &quot;outline&quot;: { # The outline of a PageElement. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The outline of the image. If not set, the image has no outline.
+                        &quot;dashStyle&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The dash style of the outline.
+                        &quot;outlineFill&quot;: { # The fill of the outline. # The fill of the outline.
+                          &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                            &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                            &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                              &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              },
+                              &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                        &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The outline property state. Updating the outline on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no outline on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other outline fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                        &quot;weight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the outline.
+                          &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                          &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                        },
+                      },
+                      &quot;recolor&quot;: { # A recolor effect applied on an image. # The recolor effect of the image. If not set, the image is not recolored. This property is read-only.
+                        &quot;name&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the recolor effect. The name is determined from the `recolor_stops` by matching the gradient against the colors in the page&#x27;s current color scheme. This property is read-only.
+                        &quot;recolorStops&quot;: [ # The recolor effect is represented by a gradient, which is a list of color stops. The colors in the gradient will replace the corresponding colors at the same position in the color palette and apply to the image. This property is read-only.
+                          { # A color and position in a gradient band.
+                            &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The alpha value of this color in the gradient band. Defaults to 1.0, fully opaque.
+                            &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color of the gradient stop.
+                              &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              },
+                              &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                            },
+                            &quot;position&quot;: 3.14, # The relative position of the color stop in the gradient band measured in percentage. The value should be in the interval [0.0, 1.0].
+                          },
+                        ],
+                      },
+                      &quot;shadow&quot;: { # The shadow properties of a page element. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The shadow of the image. If not set, the image has no shadow. This property is read-only.
+                        &quot;alignment&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alignment point of the shadow, that sets the origin for translate, scale and skew of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                        &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The alpha of the shadow&#x27;s color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                        &quot;blurRadius&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The radius of the shadow blur. The larger the radius, the more diffuse the shadow becomes.
+                          &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                          &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                        },
+                        &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The shadow color value.
+                          &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                            &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                          },
+                          &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                        },
+                        &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The shadow property state. Updating the shadow on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no shadow on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other shadow fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                        &quot;rotateWithShape&quot;: True or False, # Whether the shadow should rotate with the shape. This property is read-only.
+                        &quot;transform&quot;: { # AffineTransform uses a 3x3 matrix with an implied last row of [ 0 0 1 ] to transform source coordinates (x,y) into destination coordinates (x&#x27;, y&#x27;) according to: x&#x27; x = shear_y scale_y translate_y 1 [ 1 ] After transformation, x&#x27; = scale_x * x + shear_x * y + translate_x; y&#x27; = scale_y * y + shear_y * x + translate_y; This message is therefore composed of these six matrix elements. # Transform that encodes the translate, scale, and skew of the shadow, relative to the alignment position.
+                          &quot;scaleX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate scaling element.
+                          &quot;scaleY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate scaling element.
+                          &quot;shearX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate shearing element.
+                          &quot;shearY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate shearing element.
+                          &quot;translateX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate translation element.
+                          &quot;translateY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate translation element.
+                          &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for translate elements.
+                        },
+                        &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the shadow. This property is read-only.
+                      },
+                      &quot;transparency&quot;: 3.14, # The transparency effect of the image. The value should be in the interval [0.0, 1.0], where 0 means no effect and 1 means completely transparent. This property is read-only.
+                    },
+                  },
+                  &quot;spreadsheetId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the Google Sheets spreadsheet that contains the source chart.
+                },
+                &quot;size&quot;: { # A width and height. # The size of the page element.
+                  &quot;height&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
+                    &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                  },
+                  &quot;width&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The width of the object.
+                    &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                    &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;table&quot;: { # A PageElement kind representing a table. # A table page element.
+                  &quot;columns&quot;: 42, # Number of columns in the table.
+                  &quot;horizontalBorderRows&quot;: [ # Properties of horizontal cell borders. A table&#x27;s horizontal cell borders are represented as a grid. The grid has one more row than the number of rows in the table and the same number of columns as the table. For example, if the table is 3 x 3, its horizontal borders will be represented as a grid with 4 rows and 3 columns.
+                    { # Contents of each border row in a table.
+                      &quot;tableBorderCells&quot;: [ # Properties of each border cell. When a border&#x27;s adjacent table cells are merged, it is not included in the response.
+                        { # The properties of each border cell.
+                          &quot;location&quot;: { # A location of a single table cell within a table. # The location of the border within the border table.
+                            &quot;columnIndex&quot;: 42, # The 0-based column index.
+                            &quot;rowIndex&quot;: 42, # The 0-based row index.
+                          },
+                          &quot;tableBorderProperties&quot;: { # The border styling properties of the TableBorderCell. # The border properties.
+                            &quot;dashStyle&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The dash style of the border.
+                            &quot;tableBorderFill&quot;: { # The fill of the border. # The fill of the table border.
+                              &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid fill.
+                                &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                                &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                                  &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                            },
+                            &quot;weight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the border.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                      ],
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  &quot;rows&quot;: 42, # Number of rows in the table.
+                  &quot;tableColumns&quot;: [ # Properties of each column.
+                    { # Properties of each column in a table.
+                      &quot;columnWidth&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # Width of a column.
+                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  &quot;tableRows&quot;: [ # Properties and contents of each row. Cells that span multiple rows are contained in only one of these rows and have a row_span greater than 1.
+                    { # Properties and contents of each row in a table.
+                      &quot;rowHeight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # Height of a row.
+                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                      &quot;tableCells&quot;: [ # Properties and contents of each cell. Cells that span multiple columns are represented only once with a column_span greater than 1. As a result, the length of this collection does not always match the number of columns of the entire table.
+                        { # Properties and contents of each table cell.
+                          &quot;columnSpan&quot;: 42, # Column span of the cell.
+                          &quot;location&quot;: { # A location of a single table cell within a table. # The location of the cell within the table.
+                            &quot;columnIndex&quot;: 42, # The 0-based column index.
+                            &quot;rowIndex&quot;: 42, # The 0-based row index.
+                          },
+                          &quot;rowSpan&quot;: 42, # Row span of the cell.
+                          &quot;tableCellProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the TableCell. # The properties of the table cell.
+                            &quot;contentAlignment&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The alignment of the content in the table cell. The default alignment matches the alignment for newly created table cells in the Slides editor.
+                            &quot;tableCellBackgroundFill&quot;: { # The table cell background fill. # The background fill of the table cell. The default fill matches the fill for newly created table cells in the Slides editor.
+                              &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The background fill property state. Updating the fill on a table cell will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no fill on a table cell, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other fill fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                              &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                                &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                                &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                                  &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                            },
+                          },
+                          &quot;text&quot;: { # The general text content. The text must reside in a compatible shape (e.g. text box or rectangle) or a table cell in a page. # The text content of the cell.
+                            &quot;lists&quot;: { # The bulleted lists contained in this text, keyed by list ID.
+                              &quot;a_key&quot;: { # A List describes the look and feel of bullets belonging to paragraphs associated with a list. A paragraph that is part of a list has an implicit reference to that list&#x27;s ID.
+                                &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the list.
+                                &quot;nestingLevel&quot;: { # A map of nesting levels to the properties of bullets at the associated level. A list has at most nine levels of nesting, so the possible values for the keys of this map are 0 through 8, inclusive.
+                                  &quot;a_key&quot;: { # Contains properties describing the look and feel of a list bullet at a given level of nesting.
+                                    &quot;bulletStyle&quot;: { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The style of a bullet at this level of nesting.
+                                      &quot;backgroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                        &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                          &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                            &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          },
+                                          &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                        },
+                                      },
+                                      &quot;baselineOffset&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text&#x27;s vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                                      &quot;bold&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                                      &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                                      &quot;fontSize&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text&#x27;s font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                      },
+                                      &quot;foregroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                        &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                          &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                            &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          },
+                                          &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                        },
+                                      },
+                                      &quot;italic&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                                      &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `&quot;ABC\n123&quot;`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                        &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                        &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                        &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                        &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                                      },
+                                      &quot;smallCaps&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                                      &quot;strikethrough&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                                      &quot;underline&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                                      &quot;weightedFontFamily&quot;: { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `&quot;*&quot;`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` (&quot;normal&quot;). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                        &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                        &quot;weight&quot;: 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` (&quot;normal&quot;).
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                  },
+                                },
+                              },
+                            },
+                            &quot;textElements&quot;: [ # The text contents broken down into its component parts, including styling information. This property is read-only.
+                              { # A TextElement describes the content of a range of indices in the text content of a Shape or TableCell.
+                                &quot;autoText&quot;: { # A TextElement kind that represents auto text. # A TextElement representing a spot in the text that is dynamically replaced with content that can change over time.
+                                  &quot;content&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The rendered content of this auto text, if available.
+                                  &quot;style&quot;: { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The styling applied to this auto text.
+                                    &quot;backgroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                      &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                        &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                          &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                        },
+                                        &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;baselineOffset&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text&#x27;s vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                                    &quot;bold&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                                    &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                                    &quot;fontSize&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text&#x27;s font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;foregroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                      &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                        &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                          &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                        },
+                                        &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;italic&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                                    &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `&quot;ABC\n123&quot;`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                      &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                      &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                      &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                      &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;smallCaps&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                                    &quot;strikethrough&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                                    &quot;underline&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                                    &quot;weightedFontFamily&quot;: { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `&quot;*&quot;`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` (&quot;normal&quot;). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                      &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                      &quot;weight&quot;: 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` (&quot;normal&quot;).
+                                    },
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of this auto text.
+                                },
+                                &quot;endIndex&quot;: 42, # The zero-based end index of this text element, exclusive, in Unicode code units.
+                                &quot;paragraphMarker&quot;: { # A TextElement kind that represents the beginning of a new paragraph. # A marker representing the beginning of a new paragraph. The `start_index` and `end_index` of this TextElement represent the range of the paragraph. Other TextElements with an index range contained inside this paragraph&#x27;s range are considered to be part of this paragraph. The range of indices of two separate paragraphs will never overlap.
+                                  &quot;bullet&quot;: { # Describes the bullet of a paragraph. # The bullet for this paragraph. If not present, the paragraph does not belong to a list.
+                                    &quot;bulletStyle&quot;: { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The paragraph specific text style applied to this bullet.
+                                      &quot;backgroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                        &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                          &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                            &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          },
+                                          &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                        },
+                                      },
+                                      &quot;baselineOffset&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text&#x27;s vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                                      &quot;bold&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                                      &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                                      &quot;fontSize&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text&#x27;s font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                      },
+                                      &quot;foregroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                        &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                          &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                            &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                            &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          },
+                                          &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                        },
+                                      },
+                                      &quot;italic&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                                      &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `&quot;ABC\n123&quot;`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                        &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                        &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                        &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                        &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                                      },
+                                      &quot;smallCaps&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                                      &quot;strikethrough&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                                      &quot;underline&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                                      &quot;weightedFontFamily&quot;: { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `&quot;*&quot;`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` (&quot;normal&quot;). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                        &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                        &quot;weight&quot;: 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` (&quot;normal&quot;).
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;glyph&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The rendered bullet glyph for this paragraph.
+                                    &quot;listId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The ID of the list this paragraph belongs to.
+                                    &quot;nestingLevel&quot;: 42, # The nesting level of this paragraph in the list.
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;style&quot;: { # Styles that apply to a whole paragraph. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these paragraph styles may be inherited from the parent. Which paragraph styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A paragraph not in a list will inherit its paragraph style from the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A paragraph in a list will inherit its paragraph style from the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited paragraph styles are represented as unset fields in this message. # The paragraph&#x27;s style
+                                    &quot;alignment&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text alignment for this paragraph.
+                                    &quot;direction&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text direction of this paragraph. If unset, the value defaults to LEFT_TO_RIGHT since text direction is not inherited.
+                                    &quot;indentEnd&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount indentation for the paragraph on the side that corresponds to the end of the text, based on the current text direction. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;indentFirstLine&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of indentation for the start of the first line of the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;indentStart&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount indentation for the paragraph on the side that corresponds to the start of the text, based on the current text direction. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;lineSpacing&quot;: 3.14, # The amount of space between lines, as a percentage of normal, where normal is represented as 100.0. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                    &quot;spaceAbove&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of extra space above the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;spaceBelow&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The amount of extra space below the paragraph. If unset, the value is inherited from the parent.
+                                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;spacingMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The spacing mode for the paragraph.
+                                  },
+                                },
+                                &quot;startIndex&quot;: 42, # The zero-based start index of this text element, in Unicode code units.
+                                &quot;textRun&quot;: { # A TextElement kind that represents a run of text that all has the same styling. # A TextElement representing a run of text where all of the characters in the run have the same TextStyle. The `start_index` and `end_index` of TextRuns will always be fully contained in the index range of a single `paragraph_marker` TextElement. In other words, a TextRun will never span multiple paragraphs.
+                                  &quot;content&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text of this run.
+                                  &quot;style&quot;: { # Represents the styling that can be applied to a TextRun. If this text is contained in a shape with a parent placeholder, then these text styles may be inherited from the parent. Which text styles are inherited depend on the nesting level of lists: * A text run in a paragraph that is not in a list will inherit its text style from the the newline character in the paragraph at the 0 nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. * A text run in a paragraph that is in a list will inherit its text style from the newline character in the paragraph at its corresponding nesting level of the list inside the parent placeholder. Inherited text styles are represented as unset fields in this message. If text is contained in a shape without a parent placeholder, unsetting these fields will revert the style to a value matching the defaults in the Slides editor. # The styling applied to this run.
+                                    &quot;backgroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The background color of the text. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                      &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                        &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                          &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                        },
+                                        &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;baselineOffset&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text&#x27;s vertical offset from its normal position. Text with `SUPERSCRIPT` or `SUBSCRIPT` baseline offsets is automatically rendered in a smaller font size, computed based on the `font_size` field. The `font_size` itself is not affected by changes in this field.
+                                    &quot;bold&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is rendered as bold.
+                                    &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`. Some fonts can affect the weight of the text. If an update request specifies values for both `font_family` and `bold`, the explicitly-set `bold` value is used.
+                                    &quot;fontSize&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The size of the text&#x27;s font. When read, the `font_size` will specified in points.
+                                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;foregroundColor&quot;: { # A color that can either be fully opaque or fully transparent. # The color of the text itself. If set, the color is either opaque or transparent, depending on if the `opaque_color` field in it is set.
+                                      &quot;opaqueColor&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # If set, this will be used as an opaque color. If unset, this represents a transparent color.
+                                        &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                          &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                          &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                        },
+                                        &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                      },
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;italic&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is italicized.
+                                    &quot;link&quot;: { # A hypertext link. # The hyperlink destination of the text. If unset, there is no link. Links are not inherited from parent text. Changing the link in an update request causes some other changes to the text style of the range: * When setting a link, the text foreground color will be set to ThemeColorType.HYPERLINK and the text will be underlined. If these fields are modified in the same request, those values will be used instead of the link defaults. * Setting a link on a text range that overlaps with an existing link will also update the existing link to point to the new URL. * Links are not settable on newline characters. As a result, setting a link on a text range that crosses a paragraph boundary, such as `&quot;ABC\n123&quot;`, will separate the newline character(s) into their own text runs. The link will be applied separately to the runs before and after the newline. * Removing a link will update the text style of the range to match the style of the preceding text (or the default text styles if the preceding text is another link) unless different styles are being set in the same request.
+                                      &quot;pageObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the specific page in this presentation with this ID. A page with this ID may not exist.
+                                      &quot;relativeLink&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to a slide in this presentation, addressed by its position.
+                                      &quot;slideIndex&quot;: 42, # If set, indicates this is a link to the slide at this zero-based index in the presentation. There may not be a slide at this index.
+                                      &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # If set, indicates this is a link to the external web page at this URL.
+                                    },
+                                    &quot;smallCaps&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is in small capital letters.
+                                    &quot;strikethrough&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is struck through.
+                                    &quot;underline&quot;: True or False, # Whether or not the text is underlined.
+                                    &quot;weightedFontFamily&quot;: { # Represents a font family and weight used to style a TextRun. # The font family and rendered weight of the text. This field is an extension of `font_family` meant to support explicit font weights without breaking backwards compatibility. As such, when reading the style of a range of text, the value of `weighted_font_family#font_family` will always be equal to that of `font_family`. However, when writing, if both fields are included in the field mask (either explicitly or through the wildcard `&quot;*&quot;`), their values are reconciled as follows: * If `font_family` is set and `weighted_font_family` is not, the value of `font_family` is applied with weight `400` (&quot;normal&quot;). * If both fields are set, the value of `font_family` must match that of `weighted_font_family#font_family`. If so, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned. * If `weighted_font_family` is set and `font_family` is not, the font family and weight of `weighted_font_family` is applied. * If neither field is set, the font family and weight of the text inherit from the parent. Note that these properties cannot inherit separately from each other. If an update request specifies values for both `weighted_font_family` and `bold`, the `weighted_font_family` is applied first, then `bold`. If `weighted_font_family#weight` is not set, it defaults to `400`. If `weighted_font_family` is set, then `weighted_font_family#font_family` must also be set with a non-empty value. Otherwise, a 400 bad request error is returned.
+                                      &quot;fontFamily&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The font family of the text. The font family can be any font from the Font menu in Slides or from [Google Fonts] (https://fonts.google.com/). If the font name is unrecognized, the text is rendered in `Arial`.
+                                      &quot;weight&quot;: 42, # The rendered weight of the text. This field can have any value that is a multiple of `100` between `100` and `900`, inclusive. This range corresponds to the numerical values described in the CSS 2.1 Specification, [section 15.6](https://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/fonts.html#font-boldness), with non-numerical values disallowed. Weights greater than or equal to `700` are considered bold, and weights less than `700`are not bold. The default value is `400` (&quot;normal&quot;).
+                                    },
+                                  },
+                                },
+                              },
+                            ],
+                          },
+                        },
+                      ],
+                      &quot;tableRowProperties&quot;: { # Properties of each row in a table. # Properties of the row.
+                        &quot;minRowHeight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # Minimum height of the row. The row will be rendered in the Slides editor at a height equal to or greater than this value in order to show all the text in the row&#x27;s cell(s).
+                          &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                          &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                        },
+                      },
+                    },
+                  ],
+                  &quot;verticalBorderRows&quot;: [ # Properties of vertical cell borders. A table&#x27;s vertical cell borders are represented as a grid. The grid has the same number of rows as the table and one more column than the number of columns in the table. For example, if the table is 3 x 3, its vertical borders will be represented as a grid with 3 rows and 4 columns.
+                    { # Contents of each border row in a table.
+                      &quot;tableBorderCells&quot;: [ # Properties of each border cell. When a border&#x27;s adjacent table cells are merged, it is not included in the response.
+                        { # The properties of each border cell.
+                          &quot;location&quot;: { # A location of a single table cell within a table. # The location of the border within the border table.
+                            &quot;columnIndex&quot;: 42, # The 0-based column index.
+                            &quot;rowIndex&quot;: 42, # The 0-based row index.
+                          },
+                          &quot;tableBorderProperties&quot;: { # The border styling properties of the TableBorderCell. # The border properties.
+                            &quot;dashStyle&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The dash style of the border.
+                            &quot;tableBorderFill&quot;: { # The fill of the border. # The fill of the table border.
+                              &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid fill.
+                                &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                                &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                                  &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                                    &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                    &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                                  },
+                                  &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                                },
+                              },
+                            },
+                            &quot;weight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the border.
+                              &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                              &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                            },
+                          },
+                        },
+                      ],
+                    },
+                  ],
+                },
+                &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The title of the page element. Combined with description to display alt text. The field is not supported for Group elements.
+                &quot;transform&quot;: { # AffineTransform uses a 3x3 matrix with an implied last row of [ 0 0 1 ] to transform source coordinates (x,y) into destination coordinates (x&#x27;, y&#x27;) according to: x&#x27; x = shear_y scale_y translate_y 1 [ 1 ] After transformation, x&#x27; = scale_x * x + shear_x * y + translate_x; y&#x27; = scale_y * y + shear_y * x + translate_y; This message is therefore composed of these six matrix elements. # The transform of the page element. The visual appearance of the page element is determined by its absolute transform. To compute the absolute transform, preconcatenate a page element&#x27;s transform with the transforms of all of its parent groups. If the page element is not in a group, its absolute transform is the same as the value in this field. The initial transform for the newly created Group is always the identity transform.
+                  &quot;scaleX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate scaling element.
+                  &quot;scaleY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate scaling element.
+                  &quot;shearX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate shearing element.
+                  &quot;shearY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate shearing element.
+                  &quot;translateX&quot;: 3.14, # The X coordinate translation element.
+                  &quot;translateY&quot;: 3.14, # The Y coordinate translation element.
+                  &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for translate elements.
+                },
+                &quot;video&quot;: { # A PageElement kind representing a video. # A video page element.
+                  &quot;id&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The video source&#x27;s unique identifier for this video.
+                  &quot;source&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The video source.
+                  &quot;url&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An URL to a video. The URL is valid as long as the source video exists and sharing settings do not change.
+                  &quot;videoProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the Video. # The properties of the video.
+                    &quot;autoPlay&quot;: True or False, # Whether to enable video autoplay when the page is displayed in present mode. Defaults to false.
+                    &quot;end&quot;: 42, # The time at which to end playback, measured in seconds from the beginning of the video. If set, the end time should be after the start time. If not set or if you set this to a value that exceeds the video&#x27;s length, the video will be played until its end.
+                    &quot;mute&quot;: True or False, # Whether to mute the audio during video playback. Defaults to false.
+                    &quot;outline&quot;: { # The outline of a PageElement. If these fields are unset, they may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. If there is no parent, the fields will default to the value used for new page elements created in the Slides editor, which may depend on the page element kind. # The outline of the video. The default outline matches the defaults for new videos created in the Slides editor.
+                      &quot;dashStyle&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The dash style of the outline.
+                      &quot;outlineFill&quot;: { # The fill of the outline. # The fill of the outline.
+                        &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                          &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                          &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                            &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                              &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                              &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                            },
+                            &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                          },
+                        },
+                      },
+                      &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The outline property state. Updating the outline on a page element will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no outline on a page element, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other outline fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                      &quot;weight&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The thickness of the outline.
+                        &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                        &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                      },
+                    },
+                    &quot;start&quot;: 42, # The time at which to start playback, measured in seconds from the beginning of the video. If set, the start time should be before the end time. If you set this to a value that exceeds the video&#x27;s length in seconds, the video will be played from the last second. If not set, the video will be played from the beginning.
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;wordArt&quot;: { # A PageElement kind representing word art. # A word art page element.
+                  &quot;renderedText&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The text rendered as word art.
+                },
+              },
+            ],
+            &quot;pageProperties&quot;: { # The properties of the Page. The page will inherit properties from the parent page. Depending on the page type the hierarchy is defined in either SlideProperties or LayoutProperties. # The properties of the page.
+              &quot;colorScheme&quot;: { # The palette of predefined colors for a page. # The color scheme of the page. If unset, the color scheme is inherited from a parent page. If the page has no parent, the color scheme uses a default Slides color scheme, matching the defaults in the Slides editor. Only the concrete colors of the first 12 ThemeColorTypes are editable. In addition, only the color scheme on `Master` pages can be updated. To update the field, a color scheme containing mappings from all the first 12 ThemeColorTypes to their concrete colors must be provided. Colors for the remaining ThemeColorTypes will be ignored.
+                &quot;colors&quot;: [ # The ThemeColorType and corresponding concrete color pairs.
+                  { # A pair mapping a theme color type to the concrete color it represents.
+                    &quot;color&quot;: { # An RGB color. # The concrete color corresponding to the theme color type above.
+                      &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                    },
+                    &quot;type&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the theme color.
+                  },
+                ],
+              },
+              &quot;pageBackgroundFill&quot;: { # The page background fill. # The background fill of the page. If unset, the background fill is inherited from a parent page if it exists. If the page has no parent, then the background fill defaults to the corresponding fill in the Slides editor.
+                &quot;propertyState&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The background fill property state. Updating the fill on a page will implicitly update this field to `RENDERED`, unless another value is specified in the same request. To have no fill on a page, set this field to `NOT_RENDERED`. In this case, any other fill fields set in the same request will be ignored.
+                &quot;solidFill&quot;: { # A solid color fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified color value. If any field is unset, its value may be inherited from a parent placeholder if it exists. # Solid color fill.
+                  &quot;alpha&quot;: 3.14, # The fraction of this `color` that should be applied to the pixel. That is, the final pixel color is defined by the equation: pixel color = alpha * (color) + (1.0 - alpha) * (background color) This means that a value of 1.0 corresponds to a solid color, whereas a value of 0.0 corresponds to a completely transparent color.
+                  &quot;color&quot;: { # A themeable solid color value. # The color value of the solid fill.
+                    &quot;rgbColor&quot;: { # An RGB color. # An opaque RGB color.
+                      &quot;blue&quot;: 3.14, # The blue component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      &quot;green&quot;: 3.14, # The green component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                      &quot;red&quot;: 3.14, # The red component of the color, from 0.0 to 1.0.
+                    },
+                    &quot;themeColor&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # An opaque theme color.
+                  },
+                },
+                &quot;stretchedPictureFill&quot;: { # The stretched picture fill. The page or page element is filled entirely with the specified picture. The picture is stretched to fit its container. # Stretched picture fill.
+                  &quot;contentUrl&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Reading the content_url: An URL to a picture with a default lifetime of 30 minutes. This URL is tagged with the account of the requester. Anyone with the URL effectively accesses the picture as the original requester. Access to the picture may be lost if the presentation&#x27;s sharing settings change. Writing the content_url: The picture is fetched once at insertion time and a copy is stored for display inside the presentation. Pictures must be less than 50MB in size, cannot exceed 25 megapixels, and must be in one of PNG, JPEG, or GIF format. The provided URL can be at most 2 kB in length.
+                  &quot;size&quot;: { # A width and height. # The original size of the picture fill. This field is read-only.
+                    &quot;height&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
+                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                    },
+                    &quot;width&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The width of the object.
+                      &quot;magnitude&quot;: 3.14, # The magnitude.
+                      &quot;unit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The units for magnitude.
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+              },
+            },
+            &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
+            &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
+            &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
+          },
         },
       },
       &quot;updateSlidesPosition&quot;: { # Updates the position of slides in the presentation. # Updates the position of a set of slides in the presentation.
@@ -2045,12 +3052,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale of the presentation, as an IETF BCP 47 language tag.
@@ -3061,12 +4063,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;notesMaster&quot;: { # A page in a presentation. # The notes master in the presentation. It serves three purposes: - Placeholder shapes on a notes master contain the default text styles and shape properties of all placeholder shapes on notes pages. Specifically, a `SLIDE_IMAGE` placeholder shape contains the slide thumbnail, and a `BODY` placeholder shape contains the speaker notes. - The notes master page properties define the common page properties inherited by all notes pages. - Any other shapes on the notes master appear on all notes pages. The notes master is read-only.
@@ -4075,12 +5072,7 @@
     },
     &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
     &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-    &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-      &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-      &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-    },
+    &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
   },
   &quot;pageSize&quot;: { # A width and height. # The size of pages in the presentation.
     &quot;height&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
@@ -5101,12 +6093,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The title of the presentation.
@@ -6128,12 +7115,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale of the presentation, as an IETF BCP 47 language tag.
@@ -7144,12 +8126,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;notesMaster&quot;: { # A page in a presentation. # The notes master in the presentation. It serves three purposes: - Placeholder shapes on a notes master contain the default text styles and shape properties of all placeholder shapes on notes pages. Specifically, a `SLIDE_IMAGE` placeholder shape contains the slide thumbnail, and a `BODY` placeholder shape contains the speaker notes. - The notes master page properties define the common page properties inherited by all notes pages. - Any other shapes on the notes master appear on all notes pages. The notes master is read-only.
@@ -8158,12 +9135,7 @@
     },
     &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
     &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-    &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-      &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-      &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-    },
+    &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
   },
   &quot;pageSize&quot;: { # A width and height. # The size of pages in the presentation.
     &quot;height&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
@@ -9184,12 +10156,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The title of the presentation.
@@ -10218,12 +11185,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;locale&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The locale of the presentation, as an IETF BCP 47 language tag.
@@ -11234,12 +12196,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;notesMaster&quot;: { # A page in a presentation. # The notes master in the presentation. It serves three purposes: - Placeholder shapes on a notes master contain the default text styles and shape properties of all placeholder shapes on notes pages. Specifically, a `SLIDE_IMAGE` placeholder shape contains the slide thumbnail, and a `BODY` placeholder shape contains the speaker notes. - The notes master page properties define the common page properties inherited by all notes pages. - Any other shapes on the notes master appear on all notes pages. The notes master is read-only.
@@ -12248,12 +13205,7 @@
     },
     &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
     &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-    &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-      &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-      &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-      &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-    },
+    &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
   },
   &quot;pageSize&quot;: { # A width and height. # The size of pages in the presentation.
     &quot;height&quot;: { # A magnitude in a single direction in the specified units. # The height of the object.
@@ -13274,12 +14226,7 @@
       },
       &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
       &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-        &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-        &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-        &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-      },
+      &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
     },
   ],
   &quot;title&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The title of the presentation.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html b/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html
index aab9b5e..68f1bda 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/slides_v1.presentations.pages.html
@@ -1110,12 +1110,7 @@
   },
   &quot;pageType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of the page.
   &quot;revisionId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The revision ID of the presentation containing this page. Can be used in update requests to assert that the presentation revision hasn&#x27;t changed since the last read operation. Only populated if the user has edit access to the presentation. The format of the revision ID may change over time, so it should be treated opaquely. A returned revision ID is only guaranteed to be valid for 24 hours after it has been returned and cannot be shared across users. If the revision ID is unchanged between calls, then the presentation has not changed. Conversely, a changed ID (for the same presentation and user) usually means the presentation has been updated; however, a changed ID can also be due to internal factors such as ID format changes.
-  &quot;slideProperties&quot;: { # The properties of Page that are only relevant for pages with page_type SLIDE. # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
-    &quot;isSkipped&quot;: True or False, # Whether the slide is skipped in the presentation mode. Defaults to false.
-    &quot;layoutObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the layout that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-    &quot;masterObjectId&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The object ID of the master that this slide is based on. This property is read-only.
-    &quot;notesPage&quot;: # Object with schema name: Page # The notes page that this slide is associated with. It defines the visual appearance of a notes page when printing or exporting slides with speaker notes. A notes page inherits properties from the notes master. The placeholder shape with type BODY on the notes page contains the speaker notes for this slide. The ID of this shape is identified by the speakerNotesObjectId field. The notes page is read-only except for the text content and styles of the speaker notes shape. This property is read-only.
-  },
+  &quot;slideProperties&quot;: # Object with schema name: SlideProperties # Slide specific properties. Only set if page_type = SLIDE.
 }</pre>
 </div>
 
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.backupRuns.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.backupRuns.html
index 5e77ed8..2c7220e 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.backupRuns.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.backupRuns.html
@@ -132,6 +132,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -163,6 +167,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -296,6 +304,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -327,6 +339,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.connect.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.connect.html
index d6ab29e..1518643 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.connect.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.connect.html
@@ -155,6 +155,7 @@
     },
   ],
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always `sql#connectSettings`.
+  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The cloud region for the instance. e.g. **us-central1**, **europe-west1**. The region cannot be changed after instance creation.
   &quot;serverCaCert&quot;: { # SslCerts Resource # SSL configuration.
     &quot;cert&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # PEM representation.
     &quot;certSerialNumber&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Serial number, as extracted from the certificate.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.databases.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.databases.html
index c87c4af..045e71f 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.databases.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.databases.html
@@ -135,6 +135,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -166,6 +170,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -271,6 +279,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -302,6 +314,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -412,6 +428,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -443,6 +463,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -517,6 +541,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -548,6 +576,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.instances.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.instances.html
index fb25de4..dbd2779 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.instances.html
@@ -177,6 +177,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -208,6 +212,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -280,6 +288,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -311,6 +323,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -371,6 +387,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -402,6 +422,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -480,6 +504,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -511,6 +539,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -546,6 +578,10 @@
 { # Database instance export request.
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # Contains details about the export operation.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -593,6 +629,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -624,6 +664,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -689,6 +733,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -720,6 +768,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -932,6 +984,10 @@
     &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either **PER_USE** or **PACKAGE**. Only **PER_USE** is supported for Second Generation instances.
     &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either **ASYNCHRONOUS** or **SYNCHRONOUS**. (Deprecated) This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
     &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+    &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+      &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+    },
     &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
     &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
     &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example **db-custom-1-3840**.
@@ -969,6 +1025,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -1005,6 +1065,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -1036,6 +1100,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -1242,6 +1310,10 @@
     &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either **PER_USE** or **PACKAGE**. Only **PER_USE** is supported for Second Generation instances.
     &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either **ASYNCHRONOUS** or **SYNCHRONOUS**. (Deprecated) This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
     &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+    &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+      &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+    },
     &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
     &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
     &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example **db-custom-1-3840**.
@@ -1281,6 +1353,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -1312,6 +1388,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -1528,6 +1608,10 @@
         &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either **PER_USE** or **PACKAGE**. Only **PER_USE** is supported for Second Generation instances.
         &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either **ASYNCHRONOUS** or **SYNCHRONOUS**. (Deprecated) This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
         &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+        &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+          &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+          &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+        },
         &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
         &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
         &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example **db-custom-1-3840**.
@@ -1786,6 +1870,10 @@
     &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either **PER_USE** or **PACKAGE**. Only **PER_USE** is supported for Second Generation instances.
     &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either **ASYNCHRONOUS** or **SYNCHRONOUS**. (Deprecated) This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
     &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+    &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+      &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+    },
     &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
     &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
     &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example **db-custom-1-3840**.
@@ -1825,6 +1913,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -1856,6 +1948,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -1911,6 +2007,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -1942,6 +2042,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -1997,6 +2101,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -2028,6 +2136,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -2083,6 +2195,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -2114,6 +2230,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -2181,6 +2301,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -2212,6 +2336,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -2277,6 +2405,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -2308,6 +2440,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -2363,6 +2499,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -2394,6 +2534,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -2449,6 +2593,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -2480,6 +2628,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -2545,6 +2697,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -2576,6 +2732,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -2783,6 +2943,10 @@
     &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either **PER_USE** or **PACKAGE**. Only **PER_USE** is supported for Second Generation instances.
     &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either **ASYNCHRONOUS** or **SYNCHRONOUS**. (Deprecated) This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
     &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+    &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+      &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+    },
     &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
     &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
     &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example **db-custom-1-3840**.
@@ -2822,6 +2986,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -2853,6 +3021,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.operations.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.operations.html
index 291c896..bcec13c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.operations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.operations.html
@@ -125,6 +125,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -156,6 +160,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -215,6 +223,10 @@
       },
       &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
         &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+          &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+          &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+          &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+          &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
           &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
         },
         &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -246,6 +258,10 @@
           &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
             &quot;A String&quot;,
           ],
+          &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+          &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+          &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+          &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
           &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
         },
         &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.projects.instances.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.projects.instances.html
index 9f56dd3..ac45b79 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.projects.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.projects.instances.html
@@ -135,6 +135,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -166,6 +170,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -237,6 +245,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -268,6 +280,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -311,6 +327,7 @@
   },
   &quot;syncMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # External sync mode
   &quot;verifyConnectionOnly&quot;: True or False, # Flag to enable verifying connection only
+  &quot;verifyReplicationOnly&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Flag to verify settings required by replication setup only
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.sslCerts.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.sslCerts.html
index 8a5d946..7e36ff9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.sslCerts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.sslCerts.html
@@ -168,6 +168,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -199,6 +203,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -306,6 +314,10 @@
     },
     &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
       &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+        &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+        &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+        &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+        &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
         &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
       },
       &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -337,6 +349,10 @@
         &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
           &quot;A String&quot;,
         ],
+        &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+        &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+        &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+        &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
         &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
       },
       &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html
index 4a93a5c..482c7ee 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1.users.html
@@ -130,6 +130,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -161,6 +165,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -236,6 +244,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -267,6 +279,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
@@ -383,6 +399,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. **MySQL** and **PostgreSQL** instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. **MySQL instances:** If **fileType** is **SQL** and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the **mysql** system database. If **fileType** is **CSV**, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property, which takes precedence over this property. **PostgreSQL instances:** You must specify one database to be exported. If **fileType** is **CSV**, this database must match the one specified in the **csvExportOptions.selectQuery** property. **SQL Server instances:** You must specify one database to be exported, and the **fileType** must be **BAK**.
@@ -414,6 +434,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If **fileType** is **SQL**, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If **fileType** is **CSV**, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.backupRuns.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.backupRuns.html
index 5a38d32..1b2428c 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.backupRuns.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.backupRuns.html
@@ -132,6 +132,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -163,6 +167,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -296,6 +304,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -327,6 +339,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.connect.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.connect.html
index afd10a4..d4e4ef6 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.connect.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.connect.html
@@ -155,6 +155,7 @@
     },
   ],
   &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always `sql#connectSettings`.
+  &quot;region&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The cloud region for the instance. e.g. **us-central1**, **europe-west1**. The region cannot be changed after instance creation.
   &quot;serverCaCert&quot;: { # SslCerts Resource # SSL configuration.
     &quot;cert&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # PEM representation.
     &quot;certSerialNumber&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Serial number, as extracted from the certificate.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.databases.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.databases.html
index b33f753..b7d9e3b 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.databases.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.databases.html
@@ -135,6 +135,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -166,6 +170,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -271,6 +279,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -302,6 +314,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -412,6 +428,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -443,6 +463,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -517,6 +541,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -548,6 +576,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.instances.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.instances.html
index 9dc05cd..379e080 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.instances.html
@@ -177,6 +177,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -208,6 +212,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -280,6 +288,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -311,6 +323,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -371,6 +387,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -402,6 +422,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -480,6 +504,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -511,6 +539,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -546,6 +578,10 @@
 { # Database instance export request.
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # Contains details about the export operation.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -593,6 +629,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -624,6 +664,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -689,6 +733,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -720,6 +768,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -932,6 +984,10 @@
     &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either *PER_USE* or *PACKAGE*. Only *PER_USE* is supported for Second Generation instances.
     &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either *ASYNCHRONOUS* or *SYNCHRONOUS*. (Deprecated_ This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
     &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+    &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+      &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+    },
     &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
     &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
     &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example *db-custom-1-3840* .
@@ -969,6 +1025,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -1005,6 +1065,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -1036,6 +1100,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -1242,6 +1310,10 @@
     &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either *PER_USE* or *PACKAGE*. Only *PER_USE* is supported for Second Generation instances.
     &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either *ASYNCHRONOUS* or *SYNCHRONOUS*. (Deprecated_ This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
     &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+    &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+      &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+    },
     &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
     &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
     &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example *db-custom-1-3840* .
@@ -1281,6 +1353,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -1312,6 +1388,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -1528,6 +1608,10 @@
         &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either *PER_USE* or *PACKAGE*. Only *PER_USE* is supported for Second Generation instances.
         &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either *ASYNCHRONOUS* or *SYNCHRONOUS*. (Deprecated_ This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
         &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+        &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+          &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+          &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+        },
         &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
         &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
         &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example *db-custom-1-3840* .
@@ -1786,6 +1870,10 @@
     &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either *PER_USE* or *PACKAGE*. Only *PER_USE* is supported for Second Generation instances.
     &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either *ASYNCHRONOUS* or *SYNCHRONOUS*. (Deprecated_ This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
     &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+    &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+      &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+    },
     &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
     &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
     &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example *db-custom-1-3840* .
@@ -1825,6 +1913,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -1856,6 +1948,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -1911,6 +2007,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -1942,6 +2042,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -1997,6 +2101,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -2028,6 +2136,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -2083,6 +2195,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -2114,6 +2230,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -2181,6 +2301,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -2212,6 +2336,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -2277,6 +2405,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -2308,6 +2440,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -2363,6 +2499,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -2394,6 +2534,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -2449,6 +2593,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -2480,6 +2628,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -2545,6 +2697,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -2576,6 +2732,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -2783,6 +2943,10 @@
     &quot;pricingPlan&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The pricing plan for this instance. This can be either *PER_USE* or *PACKAGE*. Only *PER_USE* is supported for Second Generation instances.
     &quot;replicationType&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The type of replication this instance uses. This can be either *ASYNCHRONOUS* or *SYNCHRONOUS*. (Deprecated_ This property was only applicable to First Generation instances.
     &quot;settingsVersion&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The version of instance settings. This is a required field for update method to make sure concurrent updates are handled properly. During update, use the most recent settingsVersion value for this instance and do not try to update this value.
+    &quot;sqlServerAuditConfig&quot;: { # SQL Server specific audit configuration. # SQL Server specific audit configuration.
+      &quot;bucket&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The name of the destination bucket (e.g., gs://mybucket).
+      &quot;kind&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is always sql#sqlServerAuditConfig
+    },
     &quot;storageAutoResize&quot;: True or False, # Configuration to increase storage size automatically. The default value is true.
     &quot;storageAutoResizeLimit&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The maximum size to which storage capacity can be automatically increased. The default value is 0, which specifies that there is no limit.
     &quot;tier&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The tier (or machine type) for this instance, for example *db-custom-1-3840* .
@@ -2822,6 +2986,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -2853,6 +3021,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.operations.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.operations.html
index 236ce67..1ca02e0 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.operations.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.operations.html
@@ -125,6 +125,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -156,6 +160,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -215,6 +223,10 @@
       },
       &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
         &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+          &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+          &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+          &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+          &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
           &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
         },
         &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -246,6 +258,10 @@
           &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
             &quot;A String&quot;,
           ],
+          &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+          &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+          &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+          &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
           &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
         },
         &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.projects.instances.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.projects.instances.html
index 1bab282..fdbb906 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.projects.instances.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.projects.instances.html
@@ -135,6 +135,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -166,6 +170,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -237,6 +245,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -268,6 +280,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -311,6 +327,7 @@
   },
   &quot;syncMode&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # External sync mode
   &quot;verifyConnectionOnly&quot;: True or False, # Flag to enable verifying connection only
+  &quot;verifyReplicationOnly&quot;: True or False, # Optional. Flag to verify settings required by replication setup only
 }
 
   x__xgafv: string, V1 error format.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.sslCerts.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.sslCerts.html
index d2fc56a..3ada534 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.sslCerts.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.sslCerts.html
@@ -168,6 +168,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -199,6 +203,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -306,6 +314,10 @@
     },
     &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
       &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+        &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+        &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+        &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+        &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
         &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
       },
       &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -337,6 +349,10 @@
         &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
           &quot;A String&quot;,
         ],
+        &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+        &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+        &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+        &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
         &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
       },
       &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
diff --git a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html
index 20e5e4c..362d6b9 100644
--- a/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html
+++ b/docs/dyn/sqladmin_v1beta4.users.html
@@ -130,6 +130,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -161,6 +165,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -236,6 +244,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -267,6 +279,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.
@@ -383,6 +399,10 @@
   },
   &quot;exportContext&quot;: { # Database instance export context. # The context for export operation, if applicable.
     &quot;csvExportOptions&quot;: { # Options for exporting data as CSV. *MySQL* and *PostgreSQL* instances only.
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;selectQuery&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The select query used to extract the data.
     },
     &quot;databases&quot;: [ # Databases to be exported. *MySQL instances:* If *fileType* is *SQL* and no database is specified, all databases are exported, except for the *mysql* system database. If *fileType* is *CSV*, you can specify one database, either by using this property or by using the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property, which takes precedence over this property. *PostgreSQL instances:* You must specify one database to be exported. If *fileType* is *CSV*, this database must match the one specified in the *csvExportOptions.selectQuery* property. *SQL Server instances:* You must specify one database to be exported, and the *fileType* must be *BAK*.
@@ -414,6 +434,10 @@
       &quot;columns&quot;: [ # The columns to which CSV data is imported. If not specified, all columns of the database table are loaded with CSV data.
         &quot;A String&quot;,
       ],
+      &quot;escapeCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that should appear before a data character that needs to be escaped.
+      &quot;fieldsTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the character that separates columns within each row (line) of the file.
+      &quot;linesTerminatedBy&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # This is used to separate lines. If a line does not contain all fields, the rest of the columns are set to their default values.
+      &quot;quoteCharacter&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # Specifies the quoting character to be used when a data value is quoted.
       &quot;table&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The table to which CSV data is imported.
     },
     &quot;database&quot;: &quot;A String&quot;, # The target database for the import. If *fileType* is *SQL*, this field is required only if the import file does not specify a database, and is overridden by any database specification in the import file. If *fileType* is *CSV*, one database must be specified.